MY18 CLA Operator Manual

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Mercedes-Benz CLA-Class Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 326

DownloadMY18 CLA Operator Manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
CLA
É1175842704eËÍ
1175842704
Order no. P117 0075 13 Part no. 117 584 2704 Edition A2018

CLA Operator's Manual

Operator's Manual

Mercedes-Benz

Symbols
In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols:

G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.

i Practical tips or further information that

could be helpful to you.
This symbol indicates an instruction
X
that must be followed.
Several of these symbols in succession
X
indicate an instruction with several
steps.
This symbol tells you where you can
(Y
page) find more information about a topic.
Dis‐ This text indicates a message on the
play multifunction display/multimedia display.

Publication details

Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstra e 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany

As at 20.10.2016

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and
warning notices in this Operator's Manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
RModel
ROrder
RCountry specification
RAvailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
RPrinted Operator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains informative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the aforementioned digital media, you also have the
option to obtain a comprehensive printed
version of the Supplement for your multi-

media system from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
The Operator's Manual on the Internet provides easy access to all information
regarding your vehicle and multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations,
interesting background information and a
wide array of search options.
Digital form as an App
Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you
can view all the information on your vehicle
and multimedia system via mobile Internet
or download it independently of network
access. Available for smartphones or tablets.
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App
may not yet be available in your country.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company

1175842704 É1175842704eËÍ

2

Contents
Index ....................................................... 4
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 23
Introduction ........................................... 23
Operation ............................................... 23
Introduction .........................................
Protecting the environment ...................
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...............
Operator's Manual .................................
Service and vehicle operation ................
Operating safety ....................................
QR codes for the rescue card ................
Data stored in the vehicle ......................
Information on copyright .......................

24
24
24
25
25
27
29
29
31

At a glance ...........................................
Cockpit ..................................................
Instrument cluster .................................
Multifunction steering wheel .................
Center console ......................................
Door control panel .................................
Overhead control panel .........................

32
32
33
34
35
38
39

Safety ...................................................
Panic alarm ............................................
Occupant safety ....................................
Children in the vehicle ...........................
Pets in the vehicle .................................
Driving safety systems ...........................
Protection against theft .........................

40
40
40
54
60
61
68

Opening and closing ...........................
SmartKey ...............................................
Doors .....................................................
Trunk .....................................................
Side windows .........................................
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel ......................................................

70
70
76
78
81

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ....
Correct driver's seat position ................
Seats .....................................................
Steering wheel .......................................

90
90
90
95

85

Mirrors ................................................... 96
Memory function ................................... 98
Lights and windshield wipers ..........
Exterior lighting ...................................
Interior lighting ....................................
Replacing bulbs ...................................
Windshield wipers ................................

100
100
103
104
107

Climate control .................................
Overview of climate control systems ...
Operating the climate control systems ....................................................
Air vents ..............................................

110
110

Driving and parking ..........................
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle .....
Driving .................................................
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .........
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....................
Automatic transmission .......................
Refueling .............................................
Parking ................................................
Driving tips ..........................................
Driving systems ...................................

121
121
121

On-board computer and displays ....
Important safety notes ........................
Displays and operation ........................
Menus and submenus .........................
Display messages ................................
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ...............................

176
176
176
179
190

Multimedia system ...........................
General notes ......................................
Important safety notes ........................
Function restrictions ............................
Operating system ................................

229
229
229
229
230

115
120

128
129
130
138
141
144
149

218

Stowage and features ...................... 237
Loading guidelines ............................... 237
Stowage areas ..................................... 237

Contents
Features .............................................. 242
Maintenance and care ......................
Engine compartment ...........................
ASSYST PLUS ......................................
Care .....................................................

257
257
261
262

Breakdown assistance .....................
Where will I find...? ..............................
Flat tire ................................................
Battery (vehicle) ..................................
Jump-starting .......................................
Towing and tow-starting ......................
Fuses ...................................................

269
269
271
276
278
281
284

Wheels and tires ...............................
Important safety notes ........................
Operation ............................................
Winter operation ..................................
Tire pressure .......................................
Loading the vehicle ..............................
All about wheels and tires ...................
Changing a wheel ................................
Wheel and tire combinations ...............

287
287
287
289
290
298
301
307
312

Technical data ...................................
Information regarding technical data ...
Vehicle electronics ..............................
Identification plates .............................
Service products and filling capacities ......................................................
Vehicle data .........................................

313
313
313
314
315
320

3

4

Index
1, 2, 3 ...
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
4MATIC
Display message ............................ 215
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
drive) .................................................. 160

A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 192
Function/notes ................................ 61
Important safety notes .................... 61
Warning lamp ................................. 220
Accident
Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 54
Activating media mode
General notes ................................ 235
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 115
Active Brake Assist
Activating or deactivating .............. 185
Display message ............................ 197
Function/notes ................................ 62
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 68
Adaptive Damping System
Function/notes ............................. 160
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 204
Function/notes ............................. 102
Switching on/off ........................... 103
Additional speedometer ................... 187
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 318
Address book
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Adjusting the volume
Multimedia system ........................ 230
Air bags
Deployment ..................................... 52
Display message ............................ 200
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 46
Important safety notes .................... 45

Introduction ..................................... 45
Knee bag .......................................... 46
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 47
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 41
Side impact air bag .......................... 47
Window curtain air bag .................... 47
Air vents
Important safety notes .................. 120
Rear ............................................... 120
Setting the center air vents ........... 120
Setting the side air vents ............... 120
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 68
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 68
Switching the function on/off
(ATA) ................................................ 68
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
AMG
Adaptive sport suspension system ................................................ 159
Performance Seat ............................ 94
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system
General Information ....................... 159
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 188
AMG Performance exhaust system ..................................................... 127
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Anti-Theft Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ashtray ............................................... 244
Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 185
Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 184
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........ 261
Driving abroad ............................... 262
Hiding a service message .............. 261

Index
Information about Service ............. 261
Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 261
Service message ............................ 261
Special service requirements ......... 261
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 68
Function ........................................... 68
Switching off the alarm .................... 68
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 185
Display message ............................ 207
Function/notes ............................. 171
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 182
Audio system
see separate operating instructions
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 204
see Lights
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 262
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) .................................... 126
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 126
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 100
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position ............. 133
Changing gear ............................... 133
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 130
Drive program ................................ 134
Drive program display .................... 130
Driving tips .................................... 133
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............................................... 128
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 129
Emergency running mode .............. 138
Engaging drive position .................. 132
Engaging neutral ............................ 131
Engaging park position
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 132

Engaging park position automatically ...............................................
Engaging reverse gear ...................
Engaging the park position ............
Holding the vehicle stationary on
uphill gradients ..............................
Kickdown .......................................
Manual shifting ..............................
Oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .....
Overview ........................................
Problem (malfunction) ...................
Pulling away ...................................
Selector lever ................................
Starting the engine ........................
Steering wheel paddle shifters ......
Transmission position display ........
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................
Transmission positions ..................
Automatic transmission emergency mode .......................................

131
131
130
134
134
136
188
130
138
125
132
124
136
132
130
133
138

B
Back button ....................................... 230
Backup lamp
Display message ............................ 203
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 61
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 73
Important safety notes .................... 73
Replacing ......................................... 73
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 278
Display message ............................ 206
Important safety notes .................. 276
Jump starting ................................. 278
Belt
see Seat belts
Belt warning ......................................... 44
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 186
Display message ............................ 208
Notes/function .............................. 172
Bluetooth®
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 233

5

6

Index
Searching for a mobile phone
(device manager) ........................... 234
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Telephony ...................................... 233
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 197
Notes ............................................. 318
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Brake lamp
Replacing bulbs ............................. 106
Brake lamps
Display message ............................ 202
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 61
BAS .................................................. 61
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 318
Braking assistance appropriate to
the situation ..................................... 63
Display message ............................ 192
EBD .................................................. 67
Hill start assist ............................... 125
HOLD function ............................... 157
Important safety notes .................. 146
Maintenance .................................. 147
Parking brake ................................ 142
Riding tips ...................................... 146
Warning lamp ................................. 219
Braking assistance appropriate to
the situation
Function/notes ................................ 63
Breakdown
Where will I find...? ........................ 269
see Flat tire
see Tow-starting
see Towing away
Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 177

C
California
Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 25

Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Car
see Vehicle
Care
Car wash ........................................ 262
Carpets .......................................... 268
Display ........................................... 266
Exhaust pipe .................................. 266
Exterior lights ................................ 265
Gear or selector lever .................... 267
Interior ........................................... 266
Matte finish ................................... 264
Notes ............................................. 262
Paint .............................................. 263
Plastic trim .................................... 266
Power washer ................................ 263
Rear view camera .......................... 265
Roof lining ...................................... 268
Seat belt ........................................ 267
Seat cover ..................................... 267
Sensors ......................................... 265
Steering wheel ............................... 267
Trim pieces .................................... 267
Washing by hand ........................... 262
Wheels ........................................... 264
Windows ........................................ 264
Wiper blades .................................. 265
Wooden trim .................................. 267
Cargo compartment enlargement ... 240
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 241
CD
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 183
Center console
Lower section .................................. 36
Upper section .................................. 35
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 187
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70
Change of address .............................. 26
Change of ownership .......................... 26
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires ............................ 308

Index
Child
Restraint system .............................. 56
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 59
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ............................................ 57
On the front-passenger seat ............ 58
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 59
Top Tether ....................................... 57
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes .................... 59
Rear doors ....................................... 60
Children
Special seat belt retractor ............... 55
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes .................... 54
Cigarette lighter ................................ 244
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ........................... 265
Climate control
Air-conditioning system ................. 111
Automatic climate control (dualzone) .............................................. 113
Controlling automatically ............... 116
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 115
Defrosting the windows ................. 118
Defrosting the windshield .............. 117
General notes ................................ 110
Indicator lamp ................................ 116
Information about using automatic climate control ..................... 114
Maximum cooling .......................... 118
Notes on using the air-conditioning system ..................................... 112
Overview of systems ...................... 110
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 119
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 116
Refrigerant ..................................... 319
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 320
Setting the air distribution ............. 116
Setting the air vents ...................... 120
Setting the airflow ......................... 117
Setting the temperature ................ 116
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 119
Switching on/off ........................... 115

Switching residual heat on/off ...... 119
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 118
Switching the ZONE function
on/off ............................................ 117
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 32
COMAND display
Cleaning ......................................... 266
Combination switch .......................... 101
Compass
Calibrating ..................................... 255
Calling up ....................................... 255
Magnetic field zone maps .............. 255
Setting ........................................... 255
Connecting a USB device
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 180
Controller ........................................... 230
Convenience closing feature .............. 83
Convenience opening feature ............ 83
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 260
Display message ............................ 205
Filling capacity ............................... 319
Important safety notes .................. 318
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 188
Temperature gauge ........................ 177
Warning lamp ................................. 225
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 31
Cornering light function
Display message ............................ 202
Cruise control
Activation conditions ..................... 150
Cruise control lever ....................... 149
Deactivating ................................... 150
Display message ............................ 210
Driving system ............................... 149
Function/notes ............................. 149
Important safety notes .................. 149
Setting a speed .............................. 150

7

8

Index
Storing and maintaining current
speed ............................................. 150
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 243
Important safety notes .................. 242
Rear compartment ......................... 243
Customer Assistance Center
(CAC) ..................................................... 28
Customer Relations Department ....... 28

D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Data
see Technical data
Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 204
Function/notes ............................. 100
Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 187
Declarations of conformity ................. 27
Diagnostics connection ...................... 28
Digital Operator's Manual
Help ................................................. 23
Introduction ..................................... 23
Digital speedometer ......................... 181
DIRECT SELECT lever
Automatic transmission ................. 130
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 261
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 191
Driving systems ............................. 207
Engine ............................................ 205
General notes ................................ 190
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 191
Lights ............................................. 202
Safety systems .............................. 192
SmartKey ....................................... 216
Tires ............................................... 211
Vehicle ........................................... 213
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activating ....................................... 152
Calling up a speed ......................... 153
Cruise control lever ....................... 152
Display Message ............................ 209
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 155
Driving tips .................................... 156

Function/notes ............................. 151
Important safety notes .................. 151
Setting a speed .............................. 154
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 154
Stopping ........................................ 154
Storing a speed .............................. 153
Switching off .................................. 155
Distance recorder ............................. 180
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 227
Distance warning function
Function/notes ................................ 62
Warning lamp ................................. 227
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 187
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 77
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) ....................................... 70
Control panel ................................... 38
Display message ............................ 216
Emergency locking ........................... 77
Emergency unlocking ....................... 77
Important safety notes .................... 76
Opening (from inside) ...................... 76
Drinking and driving ......................... 144
Drive program
Automatic transmission ................. 134
Display ........................................... 132
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 130
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 262
Driving on flooded roads .................. 148
Driving safety system
Active Brake Assist .......................... 62
Braking assistance appropriate to
the situation ..................................... 63
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 61
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 68
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 61
Distance warning function ............... 62
EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 67

Index
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 64
Important safety information ........... 61
Overview .......................................... 61
STEER CONTROL ............................. 68
Driving system
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 151
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL ............ 160
Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 161
Parking Pilot .................................. 164
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ........................................ 158
Start-off assist ............................... 158
Driving systems
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 159
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 171
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 172
Cruise control ................................ 149
Display message ............................ 207
HOLD function ............................... 157
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 174
Lane Tracking package .................. 172
Rear view camera .......................... 167
Driving tips
Automatic transmission ................. 133
Brakes ........................................... 146
Break-in period .............................. 121
Checking brake lining thickness .... 147
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 156
Downhill gradient ........................... 146
Drinking and driving ....................... 144
Driving in winter ............................. 148
Driving on flooded roads ................ 148
Driving on wet roads ...................... 148
Exhaust check ............................... 144
Fuel ................................................ 144
General .......................................... 144
Hydroplaning ................................. 148
Icy road surfaces ........................... 148
Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... 147
Snow chains .................................. 290
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 121
Wet road surface ........................... 146
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 183

see also Digital Operator's Manual ..................................................
DYNAMIC SELECT button
Climate control (3-zone automatic
climate control) .............................
Climate control (air-conditioning
system) ..........................................
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....................................................
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................

229
115
112
128
129

E
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
Display message ............................ 194
Function/notes ................................ 67
ECO display
Function/notes ............................. 145
On-board computer ....................... 180
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start .................. 126
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 126
Deactivating/activating ................. 127
General information ....................... 126
Important safety notes .................. 126
Introduction ................................... 125
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 54
Emergency release
Driver's door .................................... 77
Vehicle ............................................. 77
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation ......................................... 52
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 25
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 224
Display message ............................ 205
ECO start/stop function ................ 125
Engine number ............................... 315
Irregular running ............................ 127
Jump-starting ................................. 278

9

10

Index
Starting (important safety notes) ... 123
Starting problems .......................... 127
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 124
Starting via smartphone ................ 124
Starting with the Start/Stop button ................................................. 124
Switching off .................................. 141
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 284
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 127
Engine jump starting
see Jump starting (engine)
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 259
Additives ........................................ 318
Checking the oil level ..................... 258
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 258
Display message ............................ 206
Filling capacity ............................... 318
Notes about oil grades ................... 317
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 258
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 188
Entering an address
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 219
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 188
Characteristics ................................. 65
Deactivating/activating (button
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 66
Deactivating/activating (except
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 65
Deactivating/activating (onboard computer, except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 185
Display message ............................ 192
Function/notes ................................ 64
General notes .................................. 64
Important safety information ........... 64
Trailer stabilization ........................... 67
Warning lamp ................................. 221

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 64
Exhaust
see Exhaust pipe
Exhaust check ................................... 144
Exhaust pipe
Cleaning ......................................... 266
Exterior lighting
Cleaning ......................................... 265
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ......................................... 96
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 97
Folding in when locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 188
Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 97
Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 97
Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 97
Setting ............................................. 97
Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 99
Storing the parking position ............. 98
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 238

F
Favorites
Overview ........................................ 231
Filler cap
see Refueling
First-aid kit ......................................... 270
Flat tire
MOExtended tires .......................... 271
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 271
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 272
Floormats ........................................... 256
Frequencies
Mobile phone ................................. 313
Two-way radio ................................ 313
Fuel
Additives ........................................ 317
Consumption statistics .................. 180
Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 180
Displaying the range ...................... 180
Driving tips .................................... 144
E10 ................................................ 316
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33

Index
Grade (gasoline) ............................
Important safety notes ..................
Problem (malfunction) ...................
Refueling ........................................
Tank content/reserve fuel .............
Fuel filler flap
Opening .........................................
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ......................................
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................
Problem (malfunction) ...................
Fuses
Allocation chart .............................
Before changing .............................
Fuse box in the engine compartment ..............................................
Fuse box in the front-passenger
footwell ..........................................
Important safety notes ..................

316
316
140
138
316
139
180
316
140
285
284
285
285
284

G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 254
General notes ................................ 252
Important safety notes .................. 252
Opening/closing the garage door .. 254
Problems when programming ........ 254
Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 252
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 253
Gasoline ............................................. 316
Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 188
Genuine parts ...................................... 24
Glove box ........................................... 238
Google™ Local Search
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229

H
Handbrake
see Parking brake
HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 79

Hazard warning lamps
Display message ............................ 216
Switching on/off ........................... 102
Head restraints
Adjusting ......................................... 92
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 93
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 93
Headlamps
Fogging up ..................................... 103
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High beam flasher ............................. 101
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 102
Display message ............................ 203
Replacing bulbs ............................. 106
Switching on/off ........................... 101
Hill start assist .................................. 125
HOLD function
Activating ....................................... 157
Activation conditions ..................... 157
Deactivating ................................... 157
Display message ............................ 207
Function/notes ............................. 157
Home address
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Hood
Closing ........................................... 258
Display message ............................ 215
Important safety notes .................. 257
Opening ......................................... 257
Horn ...................................................... 32
Hydroplaning ..................................... 148

I
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 68
Indicator lamp
Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 106
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals

11

12

Index
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 33
Settings ......................................... 186
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 33
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 176
Interior lighting
Control ........................................... 104
Overview ........................................ 103
Reading lamp ................................. 103
iPod®
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229

J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 270
Using ............................................. 309
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 278

K
Key positions
Start/Stop button .......................... 122
KEYLESS-GO
Convenience closing feature ............ 83
Deactivation ..................................... 71
Locking ............................................ 71
Unlocking ......................................... 71
Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 134
Manual gearshifting ....................... 138
Knee bag .............................................. 46

L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 186
Display message ............................ 208
Function/information .................... 174
Lane Tracking package ..................... 172
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 189
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ................................................ 57
License plate lamp (display message) ................................................... 203

Light sensor (display message) ....... 204
Lights
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 102
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 100
Fogged up headlamps .................... 103
Hazard warning lamps ................... 102
High beam flasher .......................... 101
High-beam headlamps ................... 101
Light switch ................................... 100
Low-beam headlamps .................... 101
Parking lamps ................................ 101
Rear fog lamp ................................ 101
Setting exterior lighting ................. 100
Standing lamps .............................. 101
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 187
Turn signals ................................... 101
Loading guidelines ............................ 237
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 77
Emergency locking ........................... 77
From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 76
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 187
Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 202
Replacing bulbs ............................. 105
Switching on/off ........................... 101
Lumbar support
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 93

M
M+S tires ............................................
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) ..................................................
mbrace
Call priority ....................................
Display message ............................

289

264
248
197

Index
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 248
Downloading routes ....................... 251
Emergency call .............................. 246
General notes ................................ 245
Geo fencing ................................... 251
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 250
MB info call button ........................ 247
Remote fault diagnosis .................. 250
Remote vehicle locking .................. 250
Roadside assistance button ........... 247
Search & Send ............................... 249
Self-test ......................................... 245
Speed alert .................................... 251
System .......................................... 245
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 252
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 249
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 72
Inserting .......................................... 72
Locking vehicle ................................ 77
Removing ......................................... 72
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 77
Memory card (audio) ......................... 183
Memory function ................................. 98
Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 191
Messages
see Display messages
Mirror turn signal
Cleaning ......................................... 265
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) .............................................. 233
Connecting (device manager) ........ 234
Frequencies ................................... 313
Installation ..................................... 313
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 183
Transmission output (maximum) .... 313
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ........................................... 72
MOExtended tires .............................. 271

Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 311
Mounting a new wheel ................... 310
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 308
Raising the vehicle ......................... 309
Removing a wheel .......................... 310
Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 309
MP3
Operation ....................................... 183
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Multifunction display
Function/notes ............................. 179
Permanent display ......................... 187
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer .. 177
Overview .......................................... 34
Multimedia system
Switching on and off ...................... 230
Music files
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229

N
Navigation
Entering a destination ....................
Menu (on-board computer) ............
see also Digital Operator's Manual ..................................................
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle .......................................................

231
181
229
121

O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Conditions .......................................
Faults ...............................................
Operation .........................................
System self-test ...............................
Occupant safety
Air bags ...........................................
Automatic measures after an accident .................................................
Belt warning .....................................
Children in the vehicle .....................
Important safety notes ....................

48
51
48
50
45
54
44
54
40

13

14

Index
Introduction to the restraint system .................................................. 40
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 47
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 41
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 60
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 41
Seat belt .......................................... 41
OCS
Conditions ....................................... 48
Faults ............................................... 51
Operation ......................................... 48
System self-test ............................... 50
Odometer ........................................... 180
On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 188
Assistance graphic menu ............... 185
Assistance menu ........................... 184
Audio menu ................................... 182
Convenience submenu .................. 188
Display messages .......................... 190
Displaying a service message ........ 261
Factory settings ............................. 188
Important safety notes .................. 176
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 186
Lighting submenu .......................... 187
Menu overview .............................. 179
Message memory .......................... 191
Navigation menu ............................ 181
Operation ....................................... 177
RACETIMER ................................... 189
Service menu ................................. 186
Settings menu ............................... 186
Standard display ............................ 180
Telephone menu ............................ 183
Trip menu ...................................... 180
Vehicle submenu ........................... 187
Video DVD operation ..................... 183
Opening and closing the side trim
panels ................................................. 106
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ................ 27
Important safety notes .................... 27
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operation
Digital Operator's Manual ................ 23

Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ........................... 25
Outside temperature display ........... 176
Overhead control panel ...................... 39
Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 60

P
Paint code number ............................ 314
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 263
Panic alarm .......................................... 40
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel
Important safety notes .................... 85
Operating ......................................... 86
Operating the roller sunblinds for
the sliding sunroof ........................... 87
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89
Reversing feature ............................. 86
Parking
Important safety notes .................. 141
Parking brake ................................ 142
Parking position for the exterior
mirror on the front-passenger
side .................................................. 98
Rear view camera .......................... 167
Parking aid
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear view camera
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 163
Driving system ............................... 161
Function/notes ............................. 161
Important safety notes .................. 161
Problems (malfunctions) ................ 163
Sensor range ................................. 161
Warning display ............................. 162
Parking assistance
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Applying automatically ................... 143
Applying or releasing manually ...... 142
Display message ............................ 194
Electric parking brake .................... 142
Emergency braking ........................ 143
General notes ................................ 142
Releasing automatically ................. 143

Index
Warning lamp ................................. 224
Parking lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 101
Parking Pilot
Canceling ....................................... 167
Detecting parking spaces .............. 164
Display Message ............................ 208
Exiting a parking space .................. 166
Function/notes ............................. 164
Important safety notes .................. 164
Parking .......................................... 165
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Display message ............................ 200
Indicator lamps ................................ 41
Problem (malfunction) ................... 200
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 60
Phone book
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 266
Power washers .................................. 263
Power windows
see Side windows
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 68
Immobilizer ...................................... 68
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 24
Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 125
General notes ................................ 125
Hill start assist ............................... 125

Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Rescue card ..................................... 29
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 28

R
RACE START
Important safety notes .................. 158
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... 158

RACE TIMER (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 189
Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 182
see separate operating instructions
Radio mode
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 27
Rain closing feature (panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 87
Reading lamp ..................................... 103
Rear compartment
Setting the air vents ...................... 120
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 203
Replacing bulbs ............................. 106
Switching on/off ........................... 101
Rear lamps
see Lights
Rear seats
Folding the backrest forwards/
back ............................................... 240
Rear view camera
"Reverse parking" function ............ 169
Cleaning instructions ..................... 265
Display in the multimedia system .. 168
Function/notes ............................. 167
General notes ................................ 167
Switching on/off ........................... 168
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 119
Switching on/off ........................... 119
Rear-view mirror
Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 96
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 97
Reflective safety jacket .................... 269
Refrigerant (air-conditioning system)
Important safety notes .................. 319
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Important safety notes .................. 138
Refueling process .......................... 139
see Fuel

15

16

Index
Remote control
Garage door opener ....................... 252
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 252
Replacing bulbs
Brake lamp .................................... 106
High-beam headlamps ................... 106
Important safety notes .................. 104
Installing/removing the cover
(front wheel arch) .......................... 105
Low-beam headlamps .................... 105
Overview of bulb types .................. 104
Rear fog lamp ................................ 106
Turn signals (front) ......................... 106
Turn signals (rear) .......................... 106
Reporting safety defects .................... 28
Rescue card ......................................... 29
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 206
Warning lamp ................................. 224
see Fuel
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 119
Restraint system
Display message ............................ 198
Introduction ..................................... 40
Warning lamp ................................. 224
Warning lamp (function) ................... 41
Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 132
Reversing feature
Roller sunblind ................................. 87
Side windows ................................... 82
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26
Roller sunblind
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ..................................... 87
Roof carrier ........................................ 241
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 268
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 320
Route guidance
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229

S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 54
see Occupant safety
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
SD card
Inserting ........................................ 235
Inserting/removing ........................ 235
Removing ....................................... 235
SD memory card
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Search & Send
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Seat
Correct driver's seat position ........... 90
Seat belts
Adjusting the height ......................... 44
Cleaning ......................................... 267
Correct usage .................................. 43
Fastening ......................................... 44
Important safety guidelines ............. 42
Introduction ..................................... 41
Releasing ......................................... 44
Warning lamp ................................. 218
Warning lamp (function) ................... 44
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 92
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 91
Adjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 94
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 93
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 92
Cleaning the cover ......................... 267
Folding the backrest (rear compartment) forwards/back .............. 240
Important safety notes .................... 90
Seat heating problem ...................... 95
Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 99
Switching seat heating on/off ......... 94
Securing cargo .................................. 241
Selector lever
Cleaning ......................................... 267
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 265

Index
Service center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Service Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 186
Service message
see ASSYST PLUS
Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 318
Coolant (engine) ............................ 318
Engine oil ....................................... 317
Fuel ................................................ 315
Important safety notes .................. 315
Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 319
Washer fluid ................................... 319
Setting the air distribution ............... 116
Setting the airflow ............................ 117
Setting the date/time format
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Setting the language
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Setting the time
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 188
On-board computer ....................... 186
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 188
Side impact air bag ............................. 47
Side marker lamp (display message) ................................................... 204
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 264
Convenience closing feature ............ 83
Convenience opening feature .......... 83
Important safety information ........... 81
Opening/closing .............................. 82
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 84
Resetting ......................................... 84
Reversing feature ............................. 82

SIRIUS services
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Sliding sunroof
see Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 73
Changing the programming ............. 72
Checking the battery ....................... 73
Convenience closing feature ............ 83
Convenience opening feature .......... 83
Display message ............................ 216
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 70
Important safety notes .................... 70
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 71
Loss ................................................. 74
Mechanical key ................................ 72
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 122
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 74
Starting the engine ........................ 124
SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 122
Smartphone
Starting the engine ........................ 124
SMS
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Snow chains ...................................... 290
Sound
Switching on/off ........................... 230
Special seat belt retractor .................. 55
Specialist workshop ............................ 28
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 187
Digital ............................................ 181
In the Instrument cluster ................. 33
Segments ...................................... 176
Selecting the display unit ............... 186
SPORT handling mode
Deactivating/activating
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 66
Warning lamp ................................. 222
Standing lamps
Display message ............................ 203
Switching on/off ........................... 101

17

18

Index
Start-off assist
Activating ....................................... 158
Important safety notes .................. 158
Start/Stop button
Removing ....................................... 123
Starting the engine ........................ 124
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 123
STEER CONTROL .................................. 68
Steering
Display message ............................ 216
Steering assistant STEER CONTROL
see STEER CONTROL
Steering wheel
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 95
Button overview ............................... 34
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 177
Cleaning ......................................... 267
Important safety notes .................... 95
Paddle shifters ............................... 136
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 136
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 189
Stowage compartments
Armrest (front) ............................... 238
Armrest (under) ............................. 239
Center console .............................. 238
Center console (rear) ..................... 239
Cup holders ................................... 242
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 238
Glove box ....................................... 238
Important safety information ......... 237
Map pockets .................................. 239
Stowage net ................................... 239
Stowage net ....................................... 239
Stowage well beneath the trunk
floor .................................................... 241
Summer tires ..................................... 289
Sun visor ............................................ 243
Suspension setting
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 159
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ................................................. 119
Switching on media mode
Via the device list .......................... 235

T
Tachometer ........................................ 176
Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 203
see Lights
Tank
see Fuel tank
Tank content
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 315
Information .................................... 313
Tires/wheels ................................. 312
Vehicle data ................................... 320
Telephone
Accepting a call (multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 184
Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) ......................................... 233
Authorizing a mobile phone via the
device manager (connecting) ......... 234
Connecting a mobile phone
(device manager) ........................... 234
Connecting a mobile phone (general information) ............................ 233
Display message ............................ 216
Introduction ................................... 183
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 183
Number from the phone book ........ 184
Redialing ........................................ 184
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 184
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 177
Coolant (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 188
Engine oil (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 188
Outside temperature ...................... 176
Setting (climate control) ................ 116
Transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 188
Through-loading feature ................... 239
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 189
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 294

Index
Checking manually ........................
Display message ............................
Maximum .......................................
Not reached (TIREFIT) ....................
Notes .............................................
Reached (TIREFIT) ..........................
Recommended ...............................
Tire pressure loss warning system
General notes ................................
Important safety notes ..................
Restarting ......................................
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................
Function/notes .............................
General notes ................................
Important safety notes ..................
Radio type approval for the tire
pressure monitor ...........................
Restarting ......................................
Warning lamp .................................
Warning message ..........................
TIREFIT kit ..........................................
Important safety notes ..................
Storage location ............................
Tire pressure not reached ..............
Tire pressure reached ....................
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) .................
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) ....................
Bar (definition) ...............................
Changing a wheel ..........................
Characteristics ..............................
Checking ........................................
Curb weight (definition) .................
Definition of terms .........................
Direction of rotation ......................
Display message ............................
Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................
DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) .............................
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ...............................................
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(definition) .....................................
General notes ................................

293
211
293
274
292
274
290
293
294
294
296
294
294
295
297
297
228
296
272
272
271
274
274
307
305
305
307
305
287
306
305
308
211
307
305
305
306
312

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ...........................................
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) ..............................
Important safety notes ..................
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ......
Information on driving ....................
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...........
Labeling (overview) ........................
Load bearing index (definition) ......
Load index .....................................
Load index (definition) ...................
M+S tires .......................................
Maximum load on a tire (definition) ...............................................
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) .....................................
Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) .............................
Maximum tire load .........................
Maximum tire load (definition) .......
MOExtended tires ..........................
Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................
PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ...........................................
Replacing .......................................
Service life .....................................
Sidewall (definition) .......................
Speed rating (definition) ................
Storing ...........................................
Structure and characteristics
(definition) .....................................
Summer tires .................................
Temperature ..................................
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) .....................................
Tire bead (definition) ......................
Tire pressure (definition) ................
Tire pressures (recommended) ......
Tire size (data) ...............................
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speed rating ....................
Tire tread .......................................
Tire tread (definition) .....................
Total load limit (definition) .............
Traction .........................................

306
306
287
306
287
306
302
307
304
306
289
306
306
306
304
306
289
307
307
307
288
307
306
308
305
289
302
307
307
307
306
312
302
288
307
307
301

19

20

Index
Traction (definition) ....................... 307
Tread wear ..................................... 301
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 301
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (definition) .................... 306
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 307
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 306
see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 57
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 284
Important safety notes .................. 281
Installing the towing eye ................ 282
Removing the towing eye ............... 282
Towing a trailer
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 67
Towing away
Important safety guidelines ........... 281
Installing the towing eye ................ 282
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 284
Removing the towing eye ............... 282
Transporting the vehicle ................ 283
With both axles on the ground ....... 283
With front axle raised ..................... 282
Towing eye ......................................... 270
Traffic reports
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 130
Transporting the vehicle .................. 283
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 267
Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 180
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 180
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 181
Trunk
Emergency release .......................... 81
Emergency release button ............... 81
Important safety notes .................... 78

Opening (automatically from outside) ................................................. 79
Opening (from outside the vehicle, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .............. 79
Opening automatically from
inside ............................................... 80
Opening/closing (manually from
outside) ............................................ 78
Trunk lid
Display message ............................ 215
Opening dimensions ...................... 320
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 320
Turn signals
Display message ............................ 202
Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 106
Switching on/off ........................... 101
Two-way radio
Frequencies ................................... 313
Installation ..................................... 313
Transmission output (maximum) .... 313
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate

U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 77
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 76
Upshift indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 188
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Interface ............................................... 236

V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 244
Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 28
Data acquisition ............................... 29
Display message ............................ 213
Equipment ....................................... 25
Individual settings .......................... 186
Limited Warranty ............................. 29
Loading .......................................... 298
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 77
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 70

Index
Lowering ........................................ 311
Maintenance .................................... 26
Parking for a long period ................ 143
Pulling away ................................... 125
Raising ........................................... 309
Reporting problems ......................... 28
Securing from rolling away ............ 309
Transporting .................................. 283
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 77
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 70
Vehicle data ................................... 320
Vehicle data
Roof load (maximum) ..................... 320
Trunk load (maximum) ................... 320
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 320
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 77
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 314
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 270
Ventilation
Setting the vents ........................... 120
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 183
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
VIN
Seat ............................................... 315
Type plate ...................................... 314

W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 220
Active Brake Assist ........................ 227
Brakes ........................................... 219
Check Engine ................................. 224
Coolant .......................................... 225
Distance warning ........................... 227
ESP® .............................................. 221
ESP® OFF ....................................... 222
Fuel tank ........................................ 224
Overview .......................................... 33
PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 41
Reserve fuel ................................... 224
Restraint system ............................ 224
Seat belt ........................................ 218
SPORT handling mode ................... 222

Tire pressure monitor .................... 228
Warning triangle ................................ 270
Warranty .............................................. 25
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 216
Weather display (COMAND)
see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 229
Wheel and tire combinations
Tires ............................................... 312
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 311
Wheel chock ...................................... 309
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 307
Checking ........................................ 287
Cleaning ......................................... 264
Important safety notes .................. 287
Information on driving .................... 287
Interchanging/changing ................ 307
Mounting a new wheel ................... 310
Removing a wheel .......................... 310
Storing ........................................... 308
Tightening torque ........................... 311
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 312
Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel .......................... 308
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 199
Operation ......................................... 47
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 117
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 260
Important safety notes .................. 319
Windshield wipers
Display message ............................ 216
Problem (malfunction) ................... 109
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 108
Switching on/off ........................... 107
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 148
Snow chains .................................. 290
Winter operation
General notes ................................ 289
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 289

21

22

Index
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 265
Important safety notes .................. 108
Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 267
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop

Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 117

Digital Operator's Manual
Introduction
The printed Operator's Manual provides information about the safe operation of your vehicle.
The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on
your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. You can call up the Digital Operator's Manual via the multimedia system.

i You will not incur any costs when calling up

the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital
Operator's Manual works without connecting
to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual:
RVisual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view.
RKeyword search
The keyword search allows you to search for a
keyword by entering characters.
RContents
You can select individual sections in the contents.

i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving.

Operation
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual
Press the Ø button in the center console.
The overview relating to the vehicle appears.
X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by
turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller.
X Confirm 7 the message about the warning
and safety notes.
The basic menu for the Digital Operator's
Manual appears.
X

Operating the Digital Operator's Manual
General notes
Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (Y page 230).

Content pages
The content pages can be accessed by means of
a visual search, a keyword search or using the
contents.

To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3
the controller.
X To display in full-screen or animation: slide
8 the controller to the left :.
X To select information texts or save bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to the
right ;.
X To select a link: slide 6 the controller
downwards =.
X To exit a content page: select % symbol ?.
X To call up the basic menu of the Digital
Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
X To switch functions to the multimedia
system using the buttons on the center
console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø
button.
The selected menu appears. The Digital Operator's Manual remains open in the background.
X

23

24

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

Introduction

Protecting the environment
General notes
H Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating

conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-

sumption.
make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
them.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
Ralways have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
Ralways

Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.

Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle

is stationary.

Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front.
frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.

Ravoid

Rchange gear in good time and use each gear

only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
off the engine in stationary traffic.
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.

Rswitch

Environmental concerns and recommendations
Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to
dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or reuse them. Observe the relevant environmental
rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-

ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
Rdoors
Rdoor pillars
Rdoor sills
Rseats
Rcockpit
Rinstrument cluster
Rcenter console
Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
efficiency of the restraint systems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

Service and vehicle operation
Service and vehicle operation
Warranty

Operator's Manual

The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in
accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information
booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
accordance with the following warranty terms
and conditions:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission System Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Vehicle equipment

i Should you lose your Service and Warranty

i This Operator's Manual describes all models

and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of this Operator's Manual going to print. Country-specific
differences are possible. Bear in mind that
your vehicle may not feature all functions
described here. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from
that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept
in the vehicle.

Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in California
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
covered by its express warranty.
During the period of 18 months from original
delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,
a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more
of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction
results in a condition that is likely to cause
Z

Introduction

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that
have been specifically approved for your vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts (Y page 314).

25

Introduction

26

Service and vehicle operation
death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is
driven, that defect or malfunction has been
subject to repair two or more times, and you
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair.
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction
of a less serious nature than category (1)
has been subject to repair four or more
times and you have directly notified
Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its
repair.
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Maintenance
Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you
when taking the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service
advisor will enter every service into your Maintenance Booklet on your behalf.

Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24
hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty Booklet
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle document wallet.

Change of address or change of ownership
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the
next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send us
the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe
the following points:
RService facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
RThe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for
delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
Rthe

vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
longer withstand the loads they are designed
to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. If these materials
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired,
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the two following two conditions: 1)
These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any
interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation. Changes
or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices
must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device."

Z

Introduction

Operating safety

27

28

Operating safety

Introduction

Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a
qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
! If the engine is switched off and equipment

on the diagnostics connection is used, the
starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
the next emissions test during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary
specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
correctly carry out the work required on your
vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety
Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
Ralterations, installation work and modifications
Rwork on electronic components

Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving
your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rtechnical data for the vehicle
Rtraffic rules and regulations
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
vehicles

Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following
addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects
USA only:

Data stored in the vehicle

Limited Warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual about

the proper operation of your vehicle as well as
about possible vehicle damage. Damage to
your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

QR codes for the rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident, rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the
routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information under
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data stored in the vehicle
Data storage
A wide range of electronic components in your
vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about:
Rthe vehicle's operating state
Rincidents
Rmalfunctions
In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a
system or the surroundings.
These include, for example:
Roperating conditions of system components,
e.g. fluid levels
Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its
individual components, e.g. number of wheel
revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
position
Rmalfunctions and defects in important system
components, e.g. lights, brakes
Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of stability control systems
Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
and can be used to:
Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunctions and defects
Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident
Roptimize vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory
and malfunction data memory.
Services include, for example:
Rrepair services
Rservice processes
Rwarranties
Rquality assurance
The vehicle is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using
special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required.
Z

Introduction

The following text is reproduced as required of
all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov

29

Introduction

30

Data stored in the vehicle
After a malfunction has been rectified, the information is deleted from the malfunction memory
or is continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, under
consultation with an authorized expert), could
be traced to a person.
Examples include:
Raccident reports
Rdamage to the vehicle
Rwitness statements
Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for
example, vehicle location in case of an emergency.

COMAND/mbrace
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system.
For additional information please refer to the
COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's
Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
RHow various systems in your vehicle were
operating
RWhether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened

RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal and
fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
special equipment is required. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the
vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in
connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
RHow

Information on copyright

31

Information on copyright

Introduction

General information
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle and its electronic
components is available on the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Registered trademarks
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth SIG Inc.
is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman
International Industries.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
RDTS™

Z

32

Cockpit

At a glance

Cockpit

Function

Page

:

Steering wheel paddle shifters

136

;

Combination switch

101

=

Instrument cluster

33

?

Horn

A

DIRECT SELECT lever

130

B

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display

C

Overhead control panel

Function

Page

D

Climate control systems

110

E

Ignition lock

122

F

Adjusts the steering wheel

G

Cruise control lever

149

H

Electric parking brake

142

I

Light switch

100

162

J

Diagnostics connection

39

K

Opens the hood

95

28
257

Instrument cluster

33

At a glance

Instrument cluster

Function
:

Speedometer with segments
Warning and indicator lamps:
L Low-beam headlamps
T Parking lamps
K High-beam headlamps
÷ ESP®
Electric parking brake
applied (red)
F (USA only)
! (Canada only)
! Electric parking brake
(yellow)
· Distance warning
å ESP® OFF
! ABS malfunctioning
Brakes
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)

Page
176
101
101
101
221

Function
;

#! Turn signals

101

=

Multifunction display

179

?

Tachometer
6 Restraint system
ü Seat belt not fastened
M SPORT handling mode
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
R Rear fog lamp
; Check Engine
h Tire pressure monitor

176
41
218

Coolant temperature gauge
Warning and indicator lamps:
? Coolant too hot/cold

177

224
224
227
221
220
219

Page

A

B

Fuel level indicator
Warning and indicator lamps:
æ Reserve fuel

222
101
224
228

225

224

34

Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function
:

Multifunction display

;

Multimedia system display

=

~ Rejects or ends a call
6 Makes or accepts a call
Further telephone functions
W X Adjusts volume
8 Mute
? Switches on voiceoperated control for navigation or the Voice Control System

Function

Page
179

183

i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20
you can find further information:
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
Ron voice-controlled navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions

?

ò Opens the menu list
9 : Selects a menu
a Confirms the selection
% Back
Operates the on-board computer
? Switches off voiceoperated control for navigation or the Voice Control System

i In vehicles with multimedia system

Page

177

COMAND you can find further information:
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in
the Digital Operator's Manual
Ron the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions

Center console

35

Center console

At a glance

Center console, upper section

Function
:

Multimedia system (see the
separate operating instructions)

;

c Seat heating
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
AMG adaptive sport suspension system (left side)
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
adjusts the exhaust flap of
the AMG performance
exhaust system (right side)

=

c Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC

Page

94
159

127
163

Function

Page

?

è ECO start/stop function

125

A

£ Hazard warning lamps

102

B

PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps

41

C

DYNAMIC SELECT button
å Mercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP®

128
66

36

Center console

At a glance

Center console, lower section

Function
:

Page

Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Socket
Stowage compartment

244
244

;

Cup holder

242

=

Cup holder

242

237

Function
?

Stowage compartment with
Media Interface

A

Multimedia system controller (see the separate operating instructions)

Page
237

37

At a glance

Center console

i Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Function

Function

Page

Page

?

DYNAMIC SELECT controller

129

Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Socket
Stowage compartment

244
244

A

Cup holder

242

B

Stowage compartment with
Media Interface

237

;

Selector lever

132

C

=

Manual gearshifting (permanent setting)

Multimedia system controller (see the separate operating instructions)

136

:

237

38

Door control panel

At a glance

Door control panel

Function

Page

Function

Page

:

Opens the door

76

B

;

% & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle

W Opens/closes the side
windows

82

76

C

=

r45= Saves
the seat and exterior mirror
settings

98

n Activates/deactivates
the override feature for the
side windows in the rear
compartment

60

?

Adjusts the seats electrically

92

q Opens the trunk

80

A

7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exterior
mirrors in/out electrically

96

D

Overhead control panel

39

At a glance

Overhead control panel

Function
:

Page

u Switches the rear compartment interior lighting
on/off

103

;

p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off

103

=

| Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off

103

?

ï MB Info call button
(mbrace system)

247

A

Rear-view mirror

97

B

Sets the compass

255

C

Buttons for the garage door
opener

252

Function

Page

D

F Breakdown assistance
call button (mbrace system)

247

E

G SOS button (mbrace
system)

246

F

Eyeglasses compartment

238

G

3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel with roller sunblinds

86

H

c Switches the front interior lighting on

103

I

p Switches the left-hand
reading lamp on/off

103

Occupant safety

40

Safety

Panic alarm

To activate: press and hold the
! button : for approx. one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed.
X To deactivate: press ! button : again.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS‑GO
X Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
X

Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during
an accident.
The restraint system comprises:
RSeat belt system
RAir bags
RChild restraint system
RChild seat securing systems
The components of the restraint system work in
conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
vehicle occupants:
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 43)
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 90)

As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 90).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 45).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not
protect against objects penetrating the vehicle
from the outside.
Information on restraint system operation can
be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 52).
See "Children in the vehicle" for information on
children traveling with you in the vehicle as well
as on child restraint systems (Y page 54).

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in an
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify components of the
restraint system to accommodate a person with
disabilities, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for details. USA only: for further
information contact our Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1‑800‑367‑6372).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
driving aids which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
regular intervals while the engine is running.
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational
readiness.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
system warning lamp:
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched
on
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the
engine running
Rlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNING
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as
intended during an accident. This can affect
for example the Emergency Tensioning
Device or the air bag. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
Depending on the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both
before and during a journey.
RChildren in a child restraint system:
whether the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and
size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 47) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54). There you
will also find instructions on rearward and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
front-passenger seat.
RAll other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 47). Be sure to
observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 41) and "Air bags"
(Y page 45). There you can also find information on the correct seat position.

Seat belts
Introduction

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are
part of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS).

Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants
coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
Z

41

Safety

Occupant safety

Safety

42

Occupant safety
occupant in the best position in relation to the
air bag.
The seat belt system comprises:
RSeat belts
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts
and the outer seat belts in the rear
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close
against the body. However it does not pull the
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the
backrest.
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the routing of
an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the
vehicle occupant.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are
synchronized with the front air bags, which
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency Tensioning Device and
side impact air bag could be triggered in the
event of an accident and would need to be
replaced.

Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Rthe U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle
occupants should correctly fasten their seat
belts before starting the journey.

G WARNING
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
perform its intended protective function. An

incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
The components of the restraint system work in
conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
vehicle occupants:
Rhave fastened
(Y page 43)

their seat belts correctly

Rhave

the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 90)

G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.

G WARNING
Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without an additional and suitable restraint system. If the
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under
5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint
systems.

Occupant safety

G WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended
protective function if:
Rthey

are damaged, modified, extremely
dirty, bleached or dyed
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
anchorages or inertia reels have been modified.
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
although the damage may not be visible, e.g.
due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy
when necessary. This poses an increased risk
of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Sports seat or AMG Performance seat: this
seat is designed for the standard three-point
seat belt. If you install another multi-point seat
belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraint

system cannot provide the best level of protection.

G WARNING
If you feed seat belts through the opening in
the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be
damaged or may even break in the event of an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Only use the standard three-point seat belt.
Never modify the seat belt system.

Proper use of the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 42).
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
is in motion.
When fastening the seat belt, always make sure
that:
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
Rthe seat belt is not twisted
Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder
The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck or be routed under your
arm or behind your back. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lap
as low down as possible
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
This applies particularly to pregnant women.
If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
section of the belt.
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects
If you have such items located on or in your
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store
these in a suitable place.
Ronly one person is using a seat belt
Z

Safety

If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 54) in addition to the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)" (Y page 47)

43

Occupant safety

Safety

44

Infants and children must never travel sitting
on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event
of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants
Also ensure that there are never objects
between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 237).

Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (Y page 43).

The shoulder section of the seat belt must
always be routed across the center of the shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
X To raise: slide the belt outlet up.
The belt outlet will engage in various positions.
X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide
the belt outlet down.
X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired
position and make sure that the belt outlet
engages.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found under
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 55).

Releasing seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.

Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfill their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X Press the release button in the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt
back.
Basic illustration
Adjust the seat (Y page 90).
The seat backrest must be in an almost
upright position.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet.
X Engage seat belt tongue ; in belt buckle :.
X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section
of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your
body.
X

Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
a warning tone.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has
already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
engine is started. If the front doors are closed
and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt has
not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning
lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As
soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat
belts are fastened or a front door is opened
again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the
engine is started, an additional warning tone will
sound. The warning tone switches off after six

Occupant safety

Air bags
Introduction
The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIRBAG marking.
An air bag complements the correctly fastened
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The
air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The
different air bag systems function independently from one another (Y page 52).
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
which the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
the air bag cannot protect as intended and
could even cause additional injury when
deployed. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
To avoid hazardous situations, always make
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
Rhave

fastened their seat belts correctly,
including pregnant women
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags
Rfollow the following instructions

Always make sure that there are no objects
between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants.
RAdjust

the seats properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
is in an almost upright position. The center of
the head restraint must support the head at
about eye level.
RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats
as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forward or lean against the
door or side window. You may otherwise be in
the deployment area of the air bags.
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front
of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise
be in the deployment area of the air bag.
RFor this reason, always secure persons less
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
be worn correctly.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
observe the following notes:
RAlways secure children under twelve years of

age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable
child restraint systems.
RChild restraint systems should be installed on
the rear seats.
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
when the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanently lit, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated
(Y page 41).
RAlways observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 47) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (Y page 54) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
and operating instructions.

Z

Safety

seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning
tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with
increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the
driver or front passenger have fastened their
seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again.

45

Safety

46

Occupant safety
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
an air bag from functioning correctly. Before
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air bag
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar
Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,
rear side trim or side walls
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in
the pockets of your clothing. Store such
objects in a suitable place

G WARNING
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
function correctly. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
to it.

G WARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Front air bags
! Do not place heavy objects on the front-

passenger seat. This could cause the system
to identify the seat as being occupied. In the
event of an accident, the restraint systems on

the front-passenger side may be triggered
and have to be replaced.

Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;
deploys in front of and above the glove box.
When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 41).
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front-passenger
seat is occupied (Y page 47). The
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
not lit (Y page 48)
Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
column and front-passenger knee bag ; under
the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger
knee bags are triggered together with the front
air bags.

Occupant safety

Side impact air bags
G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or prevent deployment of the air bags integrated
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
the occupant classification system (OCS)
could be adversely affected. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. It also offers additional pelvis protection for occupants in the
front seats. However, it does not protect the:
RHead
RNeck
RArms
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on
the side on which the impact occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger
side deploys under the following conditions:
Rthe OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the
belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
the side impact air bag on the front-passenger
side deploys if an appropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.

Window curtain air bags

Safety

The driver's and front-passenger knee bags
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupants in the front seats.

47

Window curtain air bags : are integrated into
the side of the roof frame and deployed in the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed
on the side on which the impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
deployed in other accident situations
(Y page 52).

Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
Depending on that result, the front-passenger
front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

Z

48

Occupant safety

Safety

Requirements
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
Rin an almost upright position with their back
against the seat backrest
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible
If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger:
Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be
sure to observe the correct positioning of the
child restraint system. Never place objects
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a
cushion. The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the seat cushion of
the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as
flat as possible against the backrest of the frontpassenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.

Operation of Occupant Classification
System (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

The indicator lamps inform you whether the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
enabled.
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
The system carries out self-diagnostics.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds.
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
If the status of the front-passenger front air bag
changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag
display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 200). When the front-passenger
seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
aware of the status of the front-passenger front
air bag both before and during the journey.

G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
Rthe classification of the person in the front-

passenger seat is correct and the front-

passenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible.
Rthe person is seated correctly.
Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger
front air bag is correct.

G WARNING
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag
can deploy in the event of an accident. The
child could be struck by the air bag. This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air
bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
to the child can occur.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
You can find more information on OCS under
"Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 51).

G WARNING
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and you position the front-passenger seat too
close to the dashboard, in the event of an
accident, the child could:
Rcome

into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.

Always move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible and fully retract the seat
cushion length. Always make sure that the
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder
belt guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
and downwards from the vehicle belt sash
guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt
sash guide and the front-passenger seat
accordingly. Always observe the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
If OCS determines that:
RThe

front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up after the system self-test and
remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
child of up to twelve months old, in a standard
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the
system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated.
But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
child, in a standard child restraint system, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can
go out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is
activated. The result of the classification is
dependent on, among other factors, the child
restraint system and the child's stature. It is
recommended that you install the child
restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after
the system self-test depending on the result
of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat

Z

49

Safety

Occupant safety

Safety

50

Occupant safety
as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
should not use the front-passenger seat.
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person of adult stature, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
goes out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is
activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 54).
When the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint
system warning lamp on the instrument cluster
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp light up simultaneously. The frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated in this
case and does not deploy during an accident.
Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
checked and repaired immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized MercedesBenz Center for this purpose.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the
seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary
repair work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for this purpose.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will
also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the
front-passenger seat. Depending on that result,
the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.

System self-test
G DANGER
If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
not light up during the system self-test, the
system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front air bag might be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all

in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
be used. Do not install a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
this case, the front-passenger front air bag
cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
Rthe classification of the person in the front-

passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardfacing child restraint system must, as far as
possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp displays the status of the front-passenger
front air bag (Y page 48). If the front-passenger
front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds
and then goes out.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System"
(Y page 51).

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 50).

Z

51

Safety

Occupant safety

52

Occupant safety

Safety

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorBAG OFF indicator lamp rect.
lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
even though the fronton the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 48).
passenger seat is occuX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the frontpied by an adult or a perpassenger seat may not be used.
son of a stature correX
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedessponding to that of an
Benz Center.
adult.
The PASSENGER AIR
OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
does not light up and/or
seat.
does not stay on.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
The front-passenger seat
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
is:
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
Runoccupied
adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
Roccupied with the
weight of a child up to X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
twelve months old in a X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
child restraint system
belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized MercedesBenz Center.

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning
Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNING
A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced

and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags
continue to perform their protective function for
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNING
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,
and a small amount of powder may also be
released. The 6 restraint system warning
lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause
short-term breathing difficulties in people with
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle
immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,
which may require special handling and regard
for the environment. National guidelines must
be observed during disposal. In California, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operation
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint
system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as:
Rduration
Rdirection
Rintensity
Based on the evaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or
rear collision.

An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
triggered, if:
Rthe ignition is switched on
Rthe components of the restraint system are
operational. You can find further information
under "Restraint system warning lamp"
(Y page 41)
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
the belt buckle of the respective front seat
The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
compartment are triggered independently of the
lock status of the seat belts.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations:
RFront air bags as well as driver's and frontpassenger knee bags
RWindow curtain air bag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt
The front-passenger front air bag is activated or
deactivated depending on the person on the
front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front
air bag can only deploy in an accident if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
BAG indicator lamps (Y page 41).
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. In the
first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled
with propellant gas. The front air bag is fully
deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold is
reached within a few milliseconds.
The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bags is determined
by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
acceleration which occurs at various points in
the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in
nature. Deployment should take place in good
time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
and the direction of the force are essentially
determined by:
Rthe distribution of forces during the collision
Rthe collision angle
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deciZ

53

Safety

Occupant safety

Safety

54

Children in the vehicle
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do
they provide an indication of air bag deployment.
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even
though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs
as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable
components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other depending on
the apparent type of accident.
RSide impact air bags on the side where the
impact takes place, independently of the
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of
the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer
seats in the second row
The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys under the following
conditions:
- the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or
- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,
independently of the use of the seat belt and
independently of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied
REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system
determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation
RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and
front-passenger side in certain situations
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system
determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat
belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.

The different air bag systems work independently of each other.

How the air bag system works is determined
by the severity of the accident detected,
especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of accident:
RFrontal collision
RSide impact
RRollover

Automatic measures after an accident
Immediately after an accident, the following
measures are implemented, depending on the
type and severity of the impact:
Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
Rthe emergency lighting is activated
Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
Rthe front side windows are lowered
Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply
is cut off
Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
call

Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children
are generally better protected there.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes in this section in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)" (Y page 47)

Children in the vehicle

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease

the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to
children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (Y page 43).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a

three-point seat belt can be properly fastened
without a booster seat.

Special seatbelt retractor
G WARNING
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
be immediately refastened. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
the special seat belt retractor and secure the
child restraint system properly.
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's
seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt
retractor. When activated, the special seat belt
retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot
slacken once the child seat is secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet.
X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
X

Activating the special seat belt retractor:
Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt
retractor is enabled.
X Push the child restraint system down so that
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.
X

Removing the child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions.
X Press the release button of the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back
towards the belt sash guide.
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Z

Safety

G WARNING

55

56

Children in the vehicle

Safety

Child restraint system
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Rthe U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
If you install a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the center rear seat, the rear arm rest
must be folded back as far as possible.
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
sudden changes of direction. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
that the base of the child restraint system is
always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
or behind the child restraint system. Only use
child restraint systems with the original cover
designed for them. Only replace damaged
covers with genuine covers.

G WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
sudden change in direction. The child
restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
You will find further information on stowing
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 237).

G WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
as intended. The child cannot then be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Replace child restraint systems which have
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system
checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
before you install a child restraint system
again.
The securing systems of child restraint systems
are:
Rthe

seat belt system
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
Rthe Top Tether anchorages
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
information on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 47). There you will also
find information on deactivating the frontpassenger front air bag.
All child restraint systems must meet the following standards:
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an
instruction label on the child restraint system.
This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the
child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
Rthe

Children in the vehicle

G WARNING
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
do not offer sufficient protection for children
whose weight combined with the child
restraint system is greater than 65 lbs (29 kg)
and who are secured using the safety belt
integrated in the child restraint system. In the
event of an accident, a child might not be
restrained correctly. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 65 lbs (29 kg), only
use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with
the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child
restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if
available.
Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child
restraint system used.
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings

! When installing the child restraint system,

make sure that the seat belt for the middle
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could
otherwise be damaged.

rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
systems are installed on the left and right of the
rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
seat belt system. Install the child seat according
to the manufacturer's instructions.

Safety

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system

Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured with
a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
If the child restraint system is equipped with a
Top Tether belt, this should always be used.

Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of
direction. As a result, child restraint systems
cannot perform their intended protective
function. Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
in the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position.
If the rear backrest is not engaged and locked,
the red lock verification indicator will be visible
(Y page 240).

X

57

Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
Z

Children in the vehicle

58

Top Tether anchorages

the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions when doing so.
X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt
A into Top Tether anchorage =.
Make sure that:
Tether hook ? is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage = as shown.
RTop Tether belt A is not twisted.
RTop Tether belt A is routed between the
rear seat backrest and the cargo compartment cover if the cargo compartment cover
is installed.

Safety

RTop

X

Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.

Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:
X

The Top Tether anchorage points are installed in
the rear compartment behind the head
restraints on the parcel shelf.
X Press down the rear of cover ; in the direction of the arrow.
Cover ; is raised slightly at the front.
X Fold cover ; up.
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:
X
X

Move head restraint : up.
Route Top Tether belt A under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.

Vehicles without adjustable head restraints:
X

or
X

Top Tether belt with one belt strap: route
Top Tether belt A centrally over head
restraint :.
Top Tether belt with two belt straps: route
one Top Tether belt A to the left and one to
the right past the side of head restraint :.

All vehicles:
X

Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system with Top Tether. Always comply with

If necessary, move head restraint : back
down again slightly . Make sure that you do
not interfere with the correct routing of Top
Tether belt A.

Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
the child restraint system on a rear seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 47).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as
a result of:
Ran incorrectly categorized person in the frontpassenger seat
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard

Children in the vehicle

If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is permanently lit (Y page 41) is the frontpassenger front air bag deactivated.
Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Forward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. Fully
retract the seat cushion length. The entire base
of the child restraint system must always rest on
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.
The backrest of the child restraint system must
lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. The child restraint system
must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load
by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the
seat backrest and the head restraint position
accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the
child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap
must be routed forward and down from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle
belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly.
Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
could:
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people

or road users

Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming

traffic

Roperate

vehicle equipment and become
trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Override feature for:
Rthe

Rthe

rear doors (Y page 60)
rear side windows (Y page 60)

G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease

the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rshift

G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.

Z

Safety

Rearward-facing child restraint system

59

60

Pets in the vehicle

Safety

G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

Override feature for the rear side windows

X

To activate/deactivate: press button :.
If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is
possible using the switches in the rear compartment.

Pets in the vehicle

You secure each door individually with the childproof locks on the rear doors. A door secured
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,
the door can be opened from the outside.
X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever
up in the direction of arrow :.
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly.
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.

G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
Ractivate

vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
endangering other road users
Unsecured animals could also be flung around
the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 61)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 61)
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 62)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 64)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 67)
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 68)
RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 68)

Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for maintaining the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only work
as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road
surface. Please pay special attention to the
notes on tires, recommended minimum tire
tread depths, etc. (Y page 288).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.
Only in this way will the driving safety systems
described in this section work as effectively as
possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when
braking.

The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you
only brake gently.

Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61).

G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 220) and display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 192).

Braking
If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over.
X To make a full brake application: depress
the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
reminder to take extra care while driving.
X

BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS
automatically boosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
Z

Safety

Driving safety systems

61

Driving safety systems

62

Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61).

Safety

G WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.

Braking
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
X

Active Brake Assist
General information
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 61).
Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and situation-dependent braking assistance
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the
risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in
front or reduce the effects of such a collision.
If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk
of collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and
audible collision warning, autonomous braking
can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply
the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adaptive Brake Assist supports you with situationdependent braking assistance.

Important safety notes
Detection of hazardous situations can be particularly impaired if:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Rthere is interference by other radar sources

Rthere

are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
Ryou are driving a new vehicle or servicing on
the Active Brake Assist system has just been
carried out
Observe the important safety notes in the
"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 121).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at low
speeds where no visible damage to the front of
the vehicle is apparent.

Activating/deactivating
Active Brake Assist is active after every ignition
cycle.
You can activate or deactivate Active Brake
Assist (Y page 185) in the on-board computer.
When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are
also deactivated.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
symbol appears in the assistance graphic display.

Distance warning function
General information
The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
collision. If the distance warning function
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
be warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 61).

G WARNING
The distance warning function does not react:
Rto

people or animals
oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
Rto

Driving safety systems

G WARNING
The distance warning function cannot always
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
Rgive

an unnecessary warning
give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance
warning function.

Rnot

Function
Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph
(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns
you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound, and
the · distance warning lamp will light up in
the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the system to display a warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obstacles
that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can
also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, Active Brake
Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous
braking function.
The autonomous braking function:
Rgives the driver more time to react to critical
driving situations
Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or
Rreduces the effects of an accident
Vehicles without Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
the autonomous braking function is available in
the following speed ranges:
R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
objects
Vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: the
autonomous braking function is available in the
following speed ranges:
R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving
objects
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
objects
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the Autonomous Braking Function to intervene.

Situation-dependent braking assistance
General information

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 61).
With the help of the radar sensor system, Adaptive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in
the path of your vehicle for an extended period
of time.
If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the
brake pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If
you apply the brakes forcefully, situationdependent braking assistance adapts to the situation and automatically increases the brake
pressure to a degree appropriate to the traffic
situation.
Situation-dependent braking assistance provides braking assistance in hazardous situations
at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar
Z

Safety

The distance warning function may not give
warnings in all critical situations. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing
road and traffic conditions.

63

Safety

64

Driving safety systems
sensor technology to assess the traffic situation.
Situation-dependent braking assistance is capable of reacting to moving objects that have
already been detected as such at least once
over the period of observation, up to vehicle
speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h).
Situation-dependent braking assistance can
also detect stationary objects, up to vehicle
speeds of around 44 mph (70 km/h).
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:
Ryou release the brake pedal.
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle.
Situation-dependent braking assistance is then
deactivated.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 61).

G WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
Rto

people or animals
oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Rto

G WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might:
Rintervene

unnecessarily
intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Rnot

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
Due to the nature of the system, complex but
non-critical driving conditions may also cause
Active Brake Assist to intervene.
Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
brake system is still available with full brake
boosting effect and BAS.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.
power transmission between the tires and the
road surface.
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from
the direction desired by the driver, one or more
wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The
engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits.
ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on
wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize
the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles
with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP®.

Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61).

Driving safety systems

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
ESP®

Drive on carefully. Have
checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your
vehicle with the front axle raised, it is important
that you observe the notes on ESP®
(Y page 282).
If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up
continuously, ESP® is deactivated.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 221) and display messages which may
be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 192).
Only use wheels with the recommended tire
sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®
General information
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out before
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
active.
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp
flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP® intervenes:
Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.
X

ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle stops
moving. The engine starts automatically when
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine
was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated
when the engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (except
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 61).
You can select between the following states of
ESP®:
RESP®
RESP®

is activated.
is deactivated.

G WARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
action for better traction on loose surfaces.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations

described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an

extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®
You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the onboard computer (Y page 185).
ESP® deactivated:
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
ESP® activated:
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Z

Safety

G WARNING

65

66

Driving safety systems
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
ESP®

If
is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the
instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:

Safety

RESP®

no longer improves driving stability.
torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
RTraction control is still activated.
RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor
is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®.
RSTEER CONTROL is no longer active.
RESP® still provides support when you brake
firmly.

REngine

In the following situations, it may be better to
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate
ESP®:
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering
characteristics are desired
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without
ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations

described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
spin.

Deactivating/activating ESP®
(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an

Important safety notes

Deactivating/activating ESP®

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

tion (Y page 61).
You can select between the following states of
ESP®:
RESP®

is activated.
handling mode is activated.
RESP® is deactivated.
RSPORT

G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following.

G WARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following.

To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly
press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The
SPORT handling mode message appears in
the multifunction display.
X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
briefly press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
X

Driving safety systems

Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or
more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP®
only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
RESP®

only improves driving stability to a limited degree.
RTraction control is still activated.
RThe engine's torque is only restricted to a
limited degree and the drive wheels may start
to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
action for better traction on loose surfaces.
RESP® still provides support when you brake
firmly.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the
instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP®

no longer improves driving stability.
torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
action for better traction on loose surfaces.
RTraction control is still activated.
RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor
is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®.
RESP® still provides support when you brake
firmly.
REngine

ESP® trailer stabilization
General information
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to
swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP®
slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting
the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized.

Important safety notes

G WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity can
tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is
a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize
the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing
the brake firmly.
ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds
of about 65 km/h.
ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®
is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction.

EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
while braking.

Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61).

G WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
risk of skidding and an accident.

Z

Safety

To deactivate ESP®: press button : until
the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster.
The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display.
X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP®
ON message appears in the multifunction display.
X

67

68

Protection against theft

Safety

You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Please observe the information on warning and
indicator lamps (Y page 220)
(Y page 220) as well as on display messages
(Y page 194).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE

To activate with the SmartKey: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off
and open the driver's door.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

X

When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been
left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated when
you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
the HOLD function (Y page 157) and hill start
assist (Y page 125).

STEER CONTROL
General information

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in particular
if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake
Rthe vehicle begins to skid

Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 61).
No steering assistance is provided from STEER
CONTROL, if:

RESP®

is malfunctioning
steering is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electrical power steering.

Rthe

Protection against theft
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.

To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
Ra door
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe hood

Protection against theft
X

or

69

To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:
press the % or & button on the SmartKey.
The alarm is stopped.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is stopped.

X

or

Safety

X

To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.

Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
the open door that triggered it, for example.
X

i If the alarm continues for more than

30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer
Assistance Center. This is done either by text
message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.

Z

70

SmartKey
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:

the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when
starting the engine using the Start/Stop button.

SmartKey functions

Opening and closing

Ropen

the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease

the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Rshifting

G WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-

netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do
not keep the SmartKey in the trunk. Otherwise,

: & To lock the vehicle
; F To open the trunk lid
= % To unlock the vehicle

If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.
X To lock: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
Rthe doors
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
three times when locking.
When the locator lighting is activated via the
multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark
after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote
control (see the separate operating instructions).
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 187).
X To open the trunk lid automatically: press
and hold the F button until the trunk lid
opens (Y page 79).

SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle.

71

Make sure that you do not touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
period.
Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 83).

You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the
SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the
& button on the SmartKey.
The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. When locking or
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance
between the SmartKey and the corresponding
door handle must not be greater than three feet
(one meter).
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. This occurs, for example:
Rwhen starting the engine
Rwhile driving
Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Rwhen the external door handles are touched
Rduring convenience closing

To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :
or ;.
X

X

To unlock the trunk lid: pull trunk lid handle :.

Deactivating and activating
If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a longer period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey will then use very little power,
thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle
must not be nearby.
X To deactivate: press the & button on the
SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then
KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 73).
X To activate: press any button on the SmartKey.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
are available again.

KEYLESS-GO start function
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle.

Z

Opening and closing

Locking and unlocking

SmartKey

72

Opening and closing

Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel
on your own.
X To change the setting: press and hold the
% and & buttons simultaneously for
approximately six seconds until the battery
indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 73).
If the setting of the locking system is changed
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X To unlock: press the % button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows:
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the driver's
door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
of the door handle on the front-passenger
door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X

To restore the factory settings: press and
hold the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the
battery check lamp flashes twice
(Y page 73).

Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 68).

There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
X

or
X

or
X

or

To deactivate the alarm with the key: press
the % or & button on the key.
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO:
press the Start/Stop button in the ignition
lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically.
X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X

Removing the mechanical key

Push release catch : in the direction of the
arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 77)
RUnlocking the trunk (Y page 81)
RLocking the vehicle (Y page 77)
X

Inserting the mechanical key
X

Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.

SmartKey

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(Y page 72).

X

Press mechanical key ; into the opening in
the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow
until battery tray cover : opens. When doing
so, do not hold cover : shut.
X Remove battery tray cover :.

X

Checking the battery

Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover :
and then press to close it.
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 72).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
the vehicle.
X

Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Change the battery (Y page 73).
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
X

i You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop.

Z

Opening and closing

SmartKey battery

73

74

SmartKey

Opening and closing

Problems with the SmartKey
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You cannot lock or
unlock the vehicle using
the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function:
try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle from close range and press the % or & button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 73) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 73).
X Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function:
try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle from close range and press the % or & button.

X

If this does not work:
Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.

X

The SmartKey is faulty.
X Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 73) and replace it if necessary
KEYLESS-GO.
(Y page 73).
If this does not work:
X Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.

X

SmartKey
Problem

75

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function:
X Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

The engine cannot be
The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
Key.
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 278).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 278).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using the Start/
Stop button. The SmartKey is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.
Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

X

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 73) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 73).
If this does not work:
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X

You have lost a SmartKey.
You have lost the
mechanical key.

Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

X

X

X
X

Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Z

Opening and closing

X

76

Doors
Doors
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:

Opening and closing

Ropen

the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease

the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Rshifting

You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (Y page 237).

Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
! The side windows will not open/close if the

To unlock and open a front door: pull door
handle ;.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and opens.
X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
knob :.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.
X

You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open the
rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not
secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 60).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door
from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 68).

Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from
the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock
the vehicle before pulling away, for example.

battery is discharged or if the side windows
have iced up. It will then not be possible to
close the door. Do not attempt to force the
door closed. You could otherwise damage the
door or the side window.
When a door is opened, the side window on that
side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the
side window closes again.

X
X

To unlock: press button :.
To lock: press button ;.
If all the doors and the trunk lid are closed, the
vehicle locks.

Doors
You could therefore lock yourself out if:
Rthe vehicle is being pushed
Rthe vehicle is being towed
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer
You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer
(Y page 187).

Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 68).
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(Y page 72).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
driver's door as far as it will go.

Automatic locking feature

Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
as far as it will go to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 72).
X

To deactivate: press and hold button : for
approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning.
X

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical
key.
X Open the driver's door.
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
doors and the trunk lid.
Z

Opening and closing

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked
or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the
inside if the vehicle has been locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can open the rear
doors from inside the vehicle unless they are
secured by the child-proof lock (Y page 60).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door
from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 68).
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or
Rif the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.

77

Trunk

78

Press the locking button on the driver’s door
(Y page 76).
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
front-passenger door and the rear doors are
still visible. Press down the locking knobs by
hand, if necessary.
X Close the driver's door.
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(Y page 72).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
driver's door as far as it will go.

Opening and closing

X

G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.

Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it
will go to position 1.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are
locked.
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 72).
X

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,

the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft
alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 320).
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 237).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
The trunk lid can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Ropened automatically from outside
Ropened automatically from inside
Rreleased with the emergency release from the
inside

Opening/closing from outside
Opening

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.

Press the % button on the SmartKey.
Pull handle :.
X Raise the trunk lid.
X

X

Trunk
Closing

79

HANDS-FREE ACCESS
G WARNING
The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot.
You could burn yourself by touching the
exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE
ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always
ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sensors.

Pull down the trunk lid using handle :.
X Let the trunk lid drop into the lock.
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the &
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
X

Opening automatically from outside
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.
Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can
be found under "Vehicle data" (Y page 320).

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection

range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk:
Rusing a car wash
Rusing a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft
(3 m) away from the vehicle.

i You can also deactivate KEYLESS-GO. Fur-

ther information on deactivating and activating KEYLESS-GO (Y page 71).

General notes
With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,
you can open the trunk lid without using your
hands. This is useful if you have your hands full.
To do this, make a kicking movement under the
bumper with your foot.
Observe the following points:
RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear
detection range of the vehicle.
RWhen making the kicking movement, make
sure that you are standing firmly on the
ground and that there is sufficient clearance
to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise
lose your balance, for example on ice.

Opening automatically
You can open the trunk lid automatically using
the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid.
X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.
or
X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid
handle and let it go again immediately.
Z

Opening and closing

Important safety notes

80

Trunk

Opening and closing

Operation

RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking

movement within the detection range of sensors :.
RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
rear area while doing so.
RDo not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement. Otherwise, the sensors may not function correctly.
RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function during engine start.
RDirt caused by road salt around sensors :
may restrict functionality.
Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality.
RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE
ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lid
could thus be opened unintentionally, for
example, when you:
- set something down or lift something up
behind the vehicle.
- polish the rear of the vehicle.
Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your
person in these situations or in situations similar to these. This will prevent the unintentional opening of the trunk lid.

X

To open: kick into sensor detection range :
below the bumper with your foot.

If the trunk lid does not open after several
attempts: wait at least ten seconds then
move your leg under the bumper once again.
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too
long, the trunk lid does not open. Repeat the leg
movement more quickly if this occurs.
X

Opening automatically from inside
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found under "Vehicle data" (Y page 320).

Opening
You can open the trunk lid from the driver's seat
when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.

Side windows

81

Fold the rear seat backrest forwards
(Y page 240).
X Insert a suitable tool ;, e.g. a screwdriver,
into opening : in the paneling.
The trunk lid is released.
X Open the trunk lid.
X

X

To open: pull remote operating switch : for
the trunk lid until the trunk lid opens.

You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehicle with the emergency release button.

Emergency release for the trunk
General notes
! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 320).
If the trunk lid can no longer be unlocked:
Rusing the SmartKey, or
Rusing the remote operating switch in the door
control panel:
Use the emergency release on the inside of the
trunk lid.
You can reach the emergency release via the
trunk.

Opening

Press emergency release button : briefly.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with
the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not open
the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or
discharged.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
REmergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.
REmergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.
X

Side windows
Important safety notes
G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If someZ

Opening and closing

Emergency release button

82

Side windows
body becomes trapped, release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side window again.

Opening and closing

G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.

someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side windows
The switches for all side windows are located on
the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take precedence.

G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts a side window from traveling
upwards during the automatic closing process,
the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window
only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window.

G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gers

Rwhile

resetting
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If

:
;
=
?

Front left
Front right
Rear right
Rear left

Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 122).
X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch.
X To open fully: press the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X To close manually: pull the corresponding
switch and hold it.
X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X To interrupt automatic operation: press/
pull the corresponding switch again.
i If you press/pull the switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is
started in the corresponding direction. You
can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again.
X

i You can continue to operate the side win-

dows after you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function remains

Side windows

i When the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 60), the side windows cannot be operated from the rear.

Convenience opening
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESSGO start function, Exclusive package or
AMG Exclusive package: you can ventilate the
vehicle before you start driving.
The SmartKey can also be used to carry out the
following functions simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind
The convenience opening feature can only be
operated using the SmartKey.
The "convenience opening" feature is also available when the vehicle is unlocked.
X Vehicles with Exclusive package or AMG
Exclusive package but without KEYLESSGO and the KEYLESS-GO start function: for
the following operations, point the tip of the
SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's
door. The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: the SmartKey must
be in close proximity to the vehicle.
Press and hold the % button until the side
windows and the panorama sunroof are in the
desired position.
If the roller sunblind of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed, the
roller sunblind is opened first.
X Press and hold the % button once more
until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel reaches the desired position.
X To interrupt convenience opening: release
the % button.

X

Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximity during the closing procedure.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESSGO start function, Exclusive Package or
AMG Exclusive Package: at the same time you
can:
Rlock

the vehicle
the side windows
Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller
sunblind.
Rclose

i Notes on the automatic reversing feature

for:
Rthe side window (Y page 82)
Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel (Y page 86)
Rthe roller sunblind (Y page 87)

Using the SmartKey
Vehicles with Exclusive package or AMG
Exclusive package but without KEYLESSGO and the KEYLESS-GO start function: for
the following operations, point the tip of the
SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's
door. The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: the SmartKey must
be in close proximity to the vehicle.

X

Press and hold the & button until the side
windows and the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
are closed.

X

Z

Opening and closing

active for five minutes or until the driver's or
front-passenger door is opened.

83

Side windows

84

On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
X Press and hold the & button again until the
roller sunblind of the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel closes.
X

To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle again until the roller sunblind of
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel closes.
X

Opening and closing

Using KEYLESS-GO
The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. The gap between
the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door handle.

Resetting the side windows
If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 82).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
the door control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 82).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the respective side window remains closed
after the button is released, then it has been
set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the
steps above.
X

Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
are fully closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
surface :.
X

Make sure that all the side windows are
closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
are closed.
X

Problems with the side windows
G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A side window cannot be
closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.

X

Remove the objects.
Close the side window.

A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
closed and you cannot
slightly:
see the cause.
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel
Important safety notes
In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel.

G WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
body parts in close proximity could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing procedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease

the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.

G WARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING
At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could
trap you or other persons. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into
the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
If somebody becomes trapped, immediately
pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of

snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It could

start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
water enters the vehicle interior.

i Resonance noises can occur in addition to

the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor presZ

Opening and closing

X

85

86

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
sure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof or
open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.

Operating the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Sliding sunroof reversing feature
In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel.
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing
process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of
the responsibility of paying attention when closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gers

Rover

the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease

the switch immediately, or

Rpress the switch in any direction during the

automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.

: To raise
; To open
= To close/lower

The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
can only be operated when the roller sunblind is
open.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction.
If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
switch again.
After opening the sliding sunroof, the roller sunblind closes slightly automatically. This reduces
drafts in the vehicle interior.
If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it lowers slightly automatically at higher speeds. The
noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a
result.
At low speeds it raises again automatically.
You can also temporarily deactivate automatic
lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The
sliding sunroof raises again automatically.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof
after switching off the engine or removing the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function
remains active for five minutes or until you open
a front door.
The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof
carrier is installed. In order to allow ventilation
of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding
sunroof.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Rain-closing feature
The rain-closing feature is only available for vehicles with a rain sensor.
When the SmartKey is in position g in the ignition lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof
closes automatically:
Rif it starts to rain.
Rat extreme outside temperatures.
Rafter six hours.
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
remains raised at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is obstructed while being closed by the
rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The
rain-closing feature is then deactivated.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
does not close if:
Rit is raised at the rear.
Rit is blocked.
Rno rain is falling on the area of the windshield
being monitored by the rain sensor. If the
vehicle, for example, is under a bridge or in a
carport, the field of the sensor may be covered.

Operating the roller sunblind for the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof during automatic opening or closing. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.

If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease

the switch immediately, or
automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.

Rduring

The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior
from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be
opened and closed when the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.

Roller sunblind reversing feature
The roller sunblind is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing
process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is
only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness when closing the roller sunblind.

G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gers

Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again man-

ually immediately after automatic reversal
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease

the switch immediately, or

Rpress the switch in any direction during the

automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.

Z

Opening and closing

If contact is made with a roof carrier approved
by Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowers
slightly but remains raised at the rear.

87

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

88

Opening and closing

Opening and closing

: To open
; To open
= To close

Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction.
If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
switch again.
After opening the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, the roller sunblind automatically closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the
vehicle interior.
X

Resetting the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel or the roller
sunblind

Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel or the roller sunblind if the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblind does not move smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow : until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
second.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow : until
the roller sunblind is fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
second.
X Make sure that the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind can
be fully opened and closed again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

89

Problems with the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
G WARNING

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel
cannot be closed and
you cannot see the
cause.

If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed during
closing and reopens again slightly:
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with more
force.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed again
during closing and reopens again slightly:
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without
the automatic reversing feature.

Z

Opening and closing

If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption, then the
backing up function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or
maximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption.

90

Seats
Correct driver's seat position
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Radjust

the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.

Ryou

should have a good overview of traffic
conditions
Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
and is routed across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area
Further related subjects:
RAdjusting the seats manually (Y page 91)
RAdjusting the seats electrically
(Y page 92)
RAdjusting the steering wheel manually
(Y page 95)
RFastening the seat belt correctly
(Y page 44)
RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
mirrors (Y page 96)
RVehicles with a memory function: saving
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings using the memory function
(Y page 99)

Seats
Important safety notes
G WARNING

Observe the following when adjusting steering
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =:
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as

possible
are sitting in a normal upright position
Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you
can depress the pedals properly
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level
by the center of the head restraint
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
Ryou can move your legs freely
Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument
cluster clearly
Ryou

Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no
SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(Y page 45) and "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 54).

G WARNING
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in

Seats
! Make sure that there are no objects in the

footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the
seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

i Further related subjects:
Rcargo

compartment enlargement (folding
down the rear seats) (Y page 240)

G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust

the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.

Adjusting the seats manually
Vehicles without the seating comfort
package

G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under the
lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat

heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.
Do not place sharp objects on the seat
cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The
seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,
child seats or booster seats.

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:
X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or
backwards.
X Release lever : again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
Backrest angle:
X
X

Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards.

Seat height:
X Pull handle ; upwards or push it down
repeatedly until the seat has reached the
desired height.

Z

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

motion. This could cause you to lose control of
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Always make sure that the driver's seat is
engaged before starting the vehicle.

91

Seats

92

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Vehicles with the seating comfort package

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:
X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or
rearwards.
X Release lever : again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
Backrest angle:
Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
X Turn handwheel A forwards or backwards.

X

Seat height:
X Pull handle ? upwards or push it down
repeatedly until the seat has reached the
desired height.
Seat cushion angle:
Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly
supported.
X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards.

X

Seat cushion length:
X Lift handle ; and slide the front part of the
seat cushion forwards or backwards.
X Release lever ; again.
The seat cushion engages.

Adjusting the seats electrically

:
;
=
?

Seat height
Seat cushion angle
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 99).

Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust

the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.

G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.

Seats

General notes
For vehicles with sports seats you cannot adjust
the front head restraints or the outer rear head
restraints.

Adjusting the head restraints manually
Adjusting the head restraint height

With this function you can adjust the distance
between the head restraint and the back of the
seat occupant's head.
X To move forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards in the direction of the arrow until it
engages.
There are several notches.
X To move backwards: press and hold release
button : and push the head restraint backwards.
X When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that
the head restraint is engaged in position.

Rear seat head restraints
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height

To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.

X

Adjusting the fore/aft position of the
head restraint

To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.

X

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back.

Z

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to
your head.

93

94

Seats
Switching the seat heating on/off

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Switching on/off

:
;
=
?

Raises the backrest contour
Softens the backrest contour
Lowers the backrest contour
Hardens the backrest contour

G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to high temperatures may be
affected or they may even suffer burn-like
injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.

AMG Performance seat
Vehicles with electrically adjustable seats:
to adjust the contour of the seat and for
improved lateral support, you can individually
adjust the front seats.

Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cushion
X To set the side bolsters of the seat cushion narrower: press button :.
X To set the side bolsters of the seat cushion wider: press button ;.
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat backrest
X To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest narrower: press button =.
X To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest wider: press button ?.

The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 122).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.

Steering wheel

95

Problems with the seat heating
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The seat heating has
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumswitched off prematurely ers are switched on.
or cannot be switched
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
on.
rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch
back on automatically.

Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust

the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.

G WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

: Release lever
; Adjusts the steering wheel height
= Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)
Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.
X Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked. When
doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
direction.

X

Adjusting the steering wheel
G WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
Z

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel

Mirrors

96

Mirrors
Rear-view mirror

Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:
press button ;.
Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press button :.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after some
time. You can adjust the selected exterior
mirror using button = as long as the indicator
lamp is lit.
X Press button = up, down, or to the right or
left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror
to the correct position. You should have a
good overview of traffic conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field
of vision.
After the engine has been started, the exterior
mirrors are automatically heated at low outside
temperatures. Heating takes a maximum of ten
minutes.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X

X

Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust

the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.

G WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
manually by switching on the rear window
defroster.

Mirrors
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically

97

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.

Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
X

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are

always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph

(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not
fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when
locking" function in the on-board computer
(Y page 188).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Briefly press :.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 188):
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into
the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button
(Y page 97) until you hear the mirror click into
place.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 96).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors
G WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
RRinse

off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting.
RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with electrolyte.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is
only available if the vehicle is equipped with the
"Mirrors package".
Z

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Exterior mirror pushed out of position

Memory function

98

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on
the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare
mode if:
Rthe ignition is switched on and
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting
is switched on.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
You can set the front-passenger side exterior
mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.
You can store this position.

Calling up a stored parking position setting
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Adjust the front-passenger side exterior mirror using the corresponding button
(Y page 96).
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
moves back to its original position:
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged
reverse gear
Rwhen you use button : to select the exterior
mirror on the driver's side
X

Memory function
Important safety notes
G WARNING

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
; Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror

= Button for the exterior mirror setting
? Memory button M

Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Press button ;.
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the default parking position.
X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to
a position that allows you to see the rear
wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i If you shift the transmission to another position, the front-passenger side exterior mirror
returns to the driving position.
X
X

If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly
children – could become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody
becomes trapped, immediately release the
memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.

Memory function

99

When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The memory function can be used at any time,
e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock.

Storing settings

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

With the memory function, you can store up to
three different settings, e.g. for three different
people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rseat and backrest position
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides

Adjust the seat (Y page 92).
Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's side
(Y page 96).
X Briefly press the M memory button and then
press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. A tone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
X
X

Calling up a stored setting
X

Press and hold the relevant preset position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior
mirrors are in the stored position.

i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon
as you release the storage position button.

Z

100

Exterior lighting
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on
even during the daytime. In some countries,
operation of the headlamps varies due to legal
requirements and self-imposed obligations.

Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using the:
switch
Rcombination switch (Y page 101)
Ron-board computer (Y page 187)

Lights and windshield wipers

Rlight

Light switch
Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps
2 X Right-hand standing lamps
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting

4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled

by the light sensor

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
B R Rear fog lamp

If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
X Turn the light switch to the à position.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically if you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
position g

Automatic headlamp mode
à is the preferred light switch position:
RThe

light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient
light (exception: poor visibility due to weather
conditions such as fog, snow or spray).
RWith the SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on
or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
RWith the engine running: if you have activated
the Daytime Running Lights function via
the on-board computer, the daytime running
lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beam
headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
X To switch on the automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to the à position.

G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times.
Canada only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you shift the automatic transmission from a driving position to position j the
daytime running lamps or low-beam headlamps
go out after 3 minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
light switch to the T position, the daytime
running lamps and parking lamps turn on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to the L position, the manual settings

Exterior lighting

Low-beam headlamps
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on
and the light switch is set to the L position.
This is a particularly useful function in the event
of rain and fog.
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

area, in accordance with the relevant legal
stipulations. Avoid using the T parking
lamps over a period of several hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand X or lefthand W standing lamps.
X

To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Standing lamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
position g in the ignition lock.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of
the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the
vehicle).

Combination switch

Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
fog. Please take note of the country-specific
regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or
start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

i When the rear fog lamp is switched on, the

center brake lamp in the tail lamp switches off
due to a legal requirement.

Parking lamps

! If the battery charge is very low, the parking

lamps or standing lamps are automatically
switched off to enable the next engine start.
Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit

To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction of
arrow ; or ?.
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The high-beam headlamps only switch on in
the à position if the low-beam headlamps
are on.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X

Z

Lights and windshield wipers

take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the
daytime running lamps function must be
switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 187).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to the T or L position, the manual
settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.

101

Exterior lighting

102

To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
move the combination switch back to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it
controls activation and deactivation of the
high-beam headlamps (Y page 102).
X To switch on the high-beam flasher: pull
the combination switch in the direction of
arrow =.
X

Lights and windshield wipers

Hazard warning lamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist
General notes
You can use this function to set the headlamps
to change between low beam and high beam
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
with their lights on, either approaching from the
opposite direction or traveling in front of your
vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. Once the
system no longer detects any other vehicles, it
reactivates the high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
Rwho

have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognize other road users
that have lights, or may recognize them too
late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated regardless. There is
a risk of an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.
Rwho

To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch, only
the turn signal lamp on the corresponding
side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
X

The hazard warning lamps automatically switch
on if:
Ran air bag is deployed or
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed
of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a
standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above
6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake application.
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
restricted if there is:
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured

Interior lighting

To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road
users are detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users
have been detected or the roads are adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
X To switch off: move the combination switch
back to its normal position.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display goes out.
X

Headlamps fogged up on the inside

Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel

: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on or off

; c Switches the front interior lighting on
= v Switches the rear interior lighting on or

off

? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control off

A p Switches the right-hand front reading

lamp on or off

B Switches the automatic interior lighting con-

trol on

Rear compartment control panel

Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of the
headlamp.

: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

; p Switches the right-hand reading lamp

on/off

Z

Lights and windshield wipers

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off

103

Replacing bulbs

104

Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
The color and brightness for the ambient lighting
may be set via the multimedia system; see the
separate operating instructions.

Automatic interior lighting control
To switch on: set the switch to center position B.
X To switch off: set the switch to the |
position.
The interior lighting automatically switches on if
you:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen a door
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior light is activated for a short while
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via
the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions.

Lights and windshield wipers

X

Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its
glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Ryou

touch it
is hot
Ryou drop it
Ryou scratch it
Rit

Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been
designed for this purpose. Only install spare
bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life
of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with
your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 104).
Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times. Have
the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and
rear lamp clusters of your vehicle are equipped
with LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
with the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools to carry out the work required.

Overview of bulb types
You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.

Replacing bulbs

105

Replacing front bulbs
Removing and installing the cover in the
front wheel housing

lamps/parking lamps/standing lamps:
H15 55 W/15 W
= Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
: Rear fog lamp: P 21 W
; Brake lamp: W 16 W
= Brake lamp: W 16 W
? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
A Backup lamp: W 16 W

You must remove the cover of the front wheel
housing before you can change the front turn
signal lamp.
X To remove: switch off the lights.
X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is released.
X Push cover ; down.
X To install: push cover ; up.
X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is locked.

Low-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps)

Remove the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 105).
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X

Z

Lights and windshield wipers

Vehicles with halogen headlamps
: Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
; High-beam headlamps/daytime running

Replacing bulbs

106

Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 105).
X

X

Lights and windshield wipers

High-beam headlamps/daytime running lamps/parking lamps and standing lamps (halogen headlamps)

Switch off the lights.
Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the stop.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.

X

X

Turn signals (halogen headlamps)

Turn the bulb counter-clockwise and pull it
out of bulb holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise
until it engages.
X

Replacing rear bulbs
Opening and closing the side trim panels

View of right-hand side trim panel

You must open the side trim panel in the trunk
before you can replace the bulbs in the tail
lamps.
X To open: release right or left side trim
panel : at the top and fold it down in the
direction of the arrow.
X To close: insert side panel :.

Tail lamps
Switch off the lights.
Open the trunk.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 106).
X
X

Switch off the lights.
Open the hood.
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X
X

Windshield wipers
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the

Bulb holder
; Brake lamp
= Brake lamp
? Rear fog lamp
A Backup lamp
B Turn signals

Combination switch
1 $ Windshield wiper off
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set

Brake lamp and backup lamp: remove the
corresponding bulb from the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
X Rear fog lamp and turn signal: press the
bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn it counter-clockwise and remove it from the bulb
holder.

X

Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and
turn it clockwise.
X Reinsert the bulb holder and engage on
retaining clips :.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 106).

X

Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when

the windshield is dry, as this could damage
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass
if wiping takes place when the windshield is
dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.

windshield after the vehicle has been washed
in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the
windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.

to low sensitivity)

3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)

4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-

shield using washer fluid

Switch on the ignition.
X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position.

X

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the windshield

becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the
windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield
wiper blades or scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch off
the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å
position, the appropriate wiping frequency is
automatically set according to the intensity of
the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is
more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper to wipe more frequently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent
you from observing the traffic conditions.

Z

Lights and windshield wipers

Press retaining clips : at the same time in
the direction of the arrows.
X Carefully remove the bulb holder together
with the connected plug and the bulbs.

X

107

Windshield wipers

108

Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.

Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With
the other hand, turn wiper blade in direction
of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as
it will go.
X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
until it engages in the removal position with a
noticeable click.

X

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make

Lights and windshield wipers

sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper

arm has been folded away from the windshield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the
windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade
and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield
may be damaged by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

X

Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
arrow ? away from the wiper arm.

Installing the wiper blades

Changing the windshield wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: switch off the engine.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

X

X

Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow :.

Windshield wipers
Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
until it engages in the locking position with a
noticeable click.
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

X

109

Remove protective film : of the service indicator on the tip of the wiper blade.
If the color of the service indicator changes from
black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.

X

i The duration of the color change varies

Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windshield wipers
are jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers
fail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

X

The windshield washer
The spray nozzles are misaligned.
fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.
zles no longer hits the
center of the windshield.

Z

Lights and windshield wipers

depending on the usage conditions.

110

Overview of climate control systems
Overview of climate control systems

Climate control

General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog
up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
The air-conditioning system or dual-zone automatic climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances from the air.
The air-conditioning system or dual-zone automatic climate control can only be operated
when the engine is running. Optimum operation
is only achieved with the side windows and panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closed.
If you start the engine using your smartphone,
the last selected climate control setting is reactivated (Y page 83).
The residual heat function can only be activated
or deactivated with the ignition switched off
(Y page 119).

Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the
side trim panel in the cargo compartment clear
(Y page 106). Otherwise the vehicle will not be
ventilated correctly.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
opening feature (Y page 83). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more
quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most parti-

cles of dust and soot and completely filters
out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
and odors. A clogged filter reduces the
amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
For this reason, you should always observe
the interval for replacing the filter, which is
specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
heavy air pollution, the interval may be
shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet.

i It is possible that under certain circumstan-

ces the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey
has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes.

Overview of climate control systems

111

Climate control

Air-conditioning system control panel

USA only
: Sets the temperature (Y page 116)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 117)
= Sets the air distribution (Y page 116)
? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 119)
A Sets the airflow (Y page 117)
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 115)
C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 118)

Canada only
: Sets the temperature (Y page 116)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 117)
= Sets the air distribution (Y page 116)
? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 119)
A Sets the airflow (Y page 117)

112

Overview of climate control systems
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 115)
C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 118)

Climate control

Notes on using the air-conditioning
system
Air-conditioning system
Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use the air-conditioning system optimally.
RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by turning control knob A clockwise to the desired
position (except position 0).
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
RRecommendation for avoiding misted
windows at low exterior temperatures or
in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with dehumidification function (Y page 115).
Set air distribution to ¯ and if possible
switch off P and O (Y page 116).
Deactivate air-recirculation mode e
(Y page 119).
Set airflow control A to a setting between 3
and 6 (Y page 117).
RRecommendation for rapid cooling or
heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set
airflow control A to a setting between 3 and
6 (Y page 117).
RRecommendation for a constant vehicle
interior temperature: set airflow control A
to a setting between 1 and 3 (Y page 117).
RRecommendation for air distribution in
winter: select the O and ¯ settings
(Y page 116).
Recommendation for air distribution in
summer: select the P or P and ¯
settings (Y page 116).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function
briefly until the windshield is clear again.

ROnly

use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
air-recirculation mode.
RIf you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display
appears for approximately three seconds at
the bottom of the screen in the multimedia
system display; see separate operating
instructions. You will see the current settings
of the various climate control functions.

DYNAMIC SELECT button (except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
You can choose between various drive programs
with the DYNAMIC SELECT button
(Y page 128).
If you have selected drive program E:
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is

deactivated and in the warming-up phase
heat output is reduced
Rthe rear window defroster running time is
reduced
Depending on the configuration, climate settings may also be influenced in the drive program I.
If you have selected drive program C or S, climate settings are not influenced.

ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output,
you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button (Y page 127).

Overview of climate control systems

113

Climate control

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

USA only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 116)
; Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 116)
= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 117)
? Increases the airflow (Y page 117)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 116)
B Display
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 119)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 115)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 116)
F Activates or deactivates maximum cooling (Y page 118)
G Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 115)
H Reduces the airflow (Y page 117)
I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 118)
J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 117)

Overview of climate control systems

Climate control

114

Canada only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 116)
; Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 116)
= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 117)
? Increases the airflow (Y page 117)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 116)
B Display
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 119)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 115)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 116)
F Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 119)
G Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 115)
H Reduces the airflow (Y page 117)
I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 118)
J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 117)

Optimum use of dual-zone automatic
climate control
Climate control system
The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of
your dual-zone automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the
à and ¿ buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function
briefly until the windshield is clear again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,

since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the
front-passenger side as well. The indicator
lamp in the á button goes out.
RUse the residual heat function if you want to
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the
ignition is switched off. The residual heat
function can only be activated or deactivated
with the ignition switched off.
RIf you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display
appears for approximately three seconds at
the bottom of the screen in the multimedia
system display; see separate operating

Operating the climate control systems

DYNAMIC SELECT button (except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
You can choose between various drive programs
with the DYNAMIC SELECT button
(Y page 128).
If you have selected drive program E:
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is

deactivated and in the warming-up phase
heat output is reduced
Rthe rear window defroster running time is
reduced
Depending on the configuration, climate settings may also be influenced in the drive program I.
If you have selected drive program C or S, climate settings are not influenced.

ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output,
you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button (Y page 127).

Operating the climate control systems
Activating/deactivating climate control
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the air
supply and air circulation are also switched off.
The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off
climate control only briefly

Air-conditioning system
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to
the desired position (except position 0)
(Y page 111).
X To switch off: turn control A counter-clockwise to position 0 (Y page 111).
X

Dual-zone automatic climate control
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode.
or
X Press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
X

i Dual-zone automatic climate control: switch
on climate control primarily using the Ã
button.

Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will
not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also
not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the
"Cooling with air-dehumidification" function
briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is only available when the engine is running. The
air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified
according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Activating/deactivating
X

Press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up or goes out.
The indicator lamp in the button indicates that
the respective function is activated. The
"Cooling with air dehumidification" function
has a delayed switch-off feature.

Climate control

instructions. You will see the current settings
of the various climate control functions.

115

Operating the climate control systems

116

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Climate control

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The indicator lamp in the Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal¿ button flashes
function.
three times or remains
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
off. The "Cooling with air
dehumidification" function cannot be switched
on.

Setting climate control to automatic

Setting the temperature

General notes

Air-conditioning system

The automatic climate control function is only
available in conjunction with dual-zone automatic climate control.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The
system automatically regulates the temperature
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is activated automatically in automatic mode.

You can set the temperature for the entire vehicle. The set temperature is automatically maintained at a constant level.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 122).
X To increase or reduce: turn control : counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 111). Only
change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting climate control to automatic
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 122).
X Set the desired temperature.
X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
activated.
X To switch to manual mode: press the É
or Ë button.
or
X Press the K or I button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
deactivated.

X

Dual-zone automatic climate control
Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. The set temperature is automatically maintained at a constant
level.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 122).
X To increase or decrease: turn control : or
E counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 113). Only change the temperature
setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡
(22 †).

Setting the air distribution
Air-conditioning system
Air distribution settings
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
P Directs air through the center and side air
vents
O Directs air through the footwell air vents

Operating the climate control systems
settings simultaneously. To do this, press
multiple air distribution buttons. The air is
then directed through various vents.

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,

airflow is always directed through the side air
vents. The side air vents can only be closed if
the adjusters are turned clockwise until they
engage.

Setting the air distribution
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯
buttons.
The corresponding indicator lamp lights up
briefly.

X

Dual-zone automatic climate control
Air distribution settings
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
P Directs air through the center and side air
vents
O Directs air through the footwell air vents
S Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
b Directs air through the defroster, center
and side air vents
a Directs air through the defroster and
footwell vents
_ Directs air through the defroster, center,
side and footwell vents

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,

airflow is always directed through the side air
vents. The side air vents can only be closed if
the adjusters are turned clockwise until they
engage.

Setting the air distribution
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly
until the desired symbol appears in the display.

Setting the airflow
Air-conditioning system
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X To increase or reduce: turn control A counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 111).
X

Dual-zone automatic climate control
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X To increase or reduce: press the K or
I button.
X

Switching the ZONE function on/off
This function is only available with dual-zone
automatic climate control.
X To activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up.
The temperature setting for the driver's side
is not adopted for the front-passenger side.
X

To deactivate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
The temperature setting for the driver's side
is adopted for the front-passenger side.

Defrosting the windshield
General notes
You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to clear a fogged up windshield and
side windows.

i You should only select the "Windshield

defrosting" function until the windshield is
clear again.

X

Switching the "Windshield defrosting"
function on or off
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.

X

Climate control

i You can also activate several air distribution

117

Climate control

118

Operating the climate control systems
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
Rhigh airflow
Rhigh temperature
Rair distribution to the windshield and front
side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
i The "Windshield defrosting" function automatically sets the blower level to the optimum
defrosting effect. As a result, the airflow may
increase or decrease automatically after the
¬ button is pressed.

i You can adjust the blower level manually

while the "Windshield defrosting" function is
in operation:
RAir-conditioning system: turn airflow control A counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 111).
RDual-zone automatic climate control: press
the ó or ô button.
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
or
X Dual-zone climate control: press the Ã
button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X Air-conditioning system: turn temperature
control : counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 111).
Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn
temperature control : or E counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 113).

MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine
is running.

To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X To deactivate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
selected settings are restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
switches to the following functions:
Rmaximum cooling
Rmaximum airflow
Rair-recirculation mode on
X

Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
Air-conditioning system
Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
i You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
X

Dual-zone automatic climate control
Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
i You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
X

Windows fogged up on the outside
Activate the windshield wipers.
Set the air distribution to P or O.
i You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
X
X

Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
window defroster switches off automatically
after several minutes.

Operating the climate control systems
Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
X

Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The rear window
defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated.

X

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from
outside. The air already inside the vehicle will
then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up.
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the
same for all control panels.

Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X To activate: press the e button.
The indicator lamp in the e button lights
up.
Air-recirculation mode switches on automatically:
X

Rat

high outside temperatures
high levels of pollution
When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the e button
is not lit. Outside air is added after about
30 minutes.
Rat

X

To deactivate: press the e button.
The indicator lamp in the e button goes
out.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically:

Rafter approximately five minutes at outside

temperatures below approximately 45 ‡
(7 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if the
"Cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside
temperatures above approximately 45 ‡
(7 †) if the "Cooling with dehumidification"
function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available in
vehicles for Canada with dual-zone automatic
climate control.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat of
the engine to continue heating the vehicle for
approximately 30 minutes after the engine has
been switched off. The heating time depends on
the set interior temperature.

i The blower will run at a low speed regardless
of the airflow setting.

Climate control

If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
defroster may switch off.

119

Air vents

120

i If you activate the residual heat function at

high temperatures, only the ventilation will be
activated. The blower runs at medium speed.

Setting the air vents

i You cannot use the ventilation to cool the

Climate control

vehicle interior to a temperature lower than
the outside temperature.

Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 122).
X Press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up or goes out.
The indicator lamp in the button indicates that
the respective function is activated.
X

i Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
Rafter

approximately 30 minutes
the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops
Rwhen

Air vents
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and

the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow
or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.

i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.

: Side window defroster vent
; Side air vent

To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in
side air vent ; to the left.
X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in
side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will go.

X

i The center and rear air vents are adjusted in
the same way.

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Driving

Important safety notes

Important safety notes

The sensor system of some driving and driving
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this
teach-in procedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future.
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,
during this period.
RChange gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area
of the tachometer.
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake
the vehicle.
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),
drive in program E.
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG
vehicles:
RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
RChange gear in good time.
After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and bring the vehicle
to full speed.
You should also observe these notes on breaking-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on
your vehicle have been replaced.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed.

G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
G WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
Rshoes

with thick soles
with high heels
Rslippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
Rshoes

G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat

and cause a fire
its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
Rlose

Z

121

Driving and parking

Driving

122

Driving

Driving and parking

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle
stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high
engine speeds and driving at full throttle until
the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to the
desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.
You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: avoid full-load

operation and engine speeds greater than
5000 rpm when the engine is cold. This helps
to protect the engine and avoids uncomfortable driving.

Key positions
SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey

(shift the transmission to position j)

1 Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition

lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.
The engine cannot be started.

Start/Stop button
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESSGO function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
starting the engine.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
ignition lock, the system needs approximately
two seconds recognition time. You can then use
the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 71)
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote
control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:
Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
Ryou will no longer be able to start the engine
with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again.
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
on the front door (Y page 76), you can continue
to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for three seconds. This function

Driving

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

: Start/Stop button
; Ignition lock

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up.
For further information on situations in which an
indicator lamp either fails to go out after the
engine is started or lights up while driving,
please refer to "Warning and indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster" (Y page 219).
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
pressed, this is the same as the SmartKey being
removed from the ignition.
X To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can now
activate the windshield wipers, for example.
The power supply is switched off again if:
Rthe driver's door is opened and
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in
this position
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
If you press Start/Stop button : once when
in this position, the ignition is switched off
again.

Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
using the SmartKey.
You can only switch between Start/Stop button
mode and SmartKey operation when the vehicle
is stationary.

You must also engage park position j.
Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.

X

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
operated

Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen

the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease

the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Rshifting

G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.

Z

Driving and parking

operates independently of the ECO start/stop
automatic engine switch-off function.

123

Driving

124

Driving and parking

G WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.

General notes
During a cold start, the engine runs at higher
speeds to enable the catalytic converter to
reach its operating temperature. The sound of
the engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmission
X

Shift the transmission to position j
(Y page 130).
The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P (Y page 130).

i You can start the engine in transmission
position j and i.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey
To start the engine using the SmartKey instead
of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop
button out of the ignition lock.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 122) and release it as soon
as the engine is running.

Starting procedure with the Start/Stop
button
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey
into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button
must be inserted in the ignition lock and the
SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for
starting the engine operates independently of
the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function.
You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always
take the SmartKey with you when leaving the

vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.
Pay attention to the important safety notes.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Press the Start/Stop button once
(Y page 122).
The engine starts.

Starting procedure via smartphone
Observe the important safety notes on starting
the engine (Y page 123).
You can also start your engine via your smartphone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the
previously selected climate control setting is
activated. In this way you can cool or heat the
interior of the vehicle before starting the journey.
Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is
safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
Observe the legal stipulations in the area where
your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smartphone may be limited to certain countries or
regions.
You can execute a maximum of two consecutive
starting attempts via your smartphone. If you
insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you
can carry out two more starting attempts.
Once you have started the engine, you can
switch the engine off via your smartphone at any
time.
You can only start the engine via your smartphone if:
Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock
Rpark position j is selected
Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed
Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated
Rthe panic alarm is not activated
Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off
Rthe hood is closed
Rthe doors are closed and locked
Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed
Also make sure that:
Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

G WARNING
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during ser-

Driving

Make sure that the engine cannot be started via
your smartphone before carrying out maintenance or repairs. You can prevent an engine
start via your smartphone, for example, if you:
Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps
Rdo not lock the doors
Ropen the hood

Pulling away
General notes
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
feature (Y page 187).
It is possible to shift the transmission from position j to the desired position only if you
depress the brake pedal. Only then can the
parking lock be deactivated.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if you do not depress the brake pedal, the
DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the
parking lock remains engaged.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you do not depress
the brake pedal, the selector lever can still be
moved but the parking lock remains engaged.
At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡
(Ò20†), you can only shift out of position j into

another transmission position when the engine
is running.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds

after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature
more quickly.
Information on the automatic release of the
electric parking brake (Y page 143).

Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
holds the vehicle for a short time after you have
removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
gives you enough time to move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
Ryou

are pulling away on a level road or on a
downhill gradient.
Rthe transmission is in position i.
Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
Further information on holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients (Y page 134).

ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped
under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the driver
wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop
function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel
consumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Z

Driving and parking

vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of
injury.
Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

125

126

Driving

Driving and parking

Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
General notes

Rthe

hood is closed.
driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened.
All of the vehicle's systems remain active when
the engine is stopped automatically.
The HOLD function can also be activated if the
engine has been switched off automatically. It is
then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
starts automatically and the braking effect of
the HOLD function is deactivated.
Automatic engine switch-off can take place a
maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then
three subsequent stops).
Rthe

Automatic engine start

: ECO start/stop display

The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you start the engine using the SmartKey or
the Start/Stop button.
If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the è
ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop
function is only available in drive program C.

Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
the ECO start/stop function switches off the
engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
when:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green.
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system.
Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is not
fogged up when the air-conditioning system is
switched on.

The engine starts automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by
pressing the ECO button
Rin transmission position D or N the brake
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not
active
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal
Ryou engage reverse gear R
Ryou move the transmission out of position P
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door
Rthe vehicle starts to roll
Rthe brake system requires this
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range
Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low
Shifting the transmission to position P does not
start the engine.

Driving
AMG Performance exhaust system
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
You can choose between different AMG Performance exhaust system volumes using the
position of the exhaust flap.
Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the quietest setting is activated.

X

To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.

X

To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.

If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops.

Setting the volume:
X Press button :.
If you select the loudest setting, indicator
lamp ; lights up.

Problems with the engine
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does not
start.

The HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 157) or Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 155).
X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.

RThere

is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
Before attempting to start the engine again:
X Turn the SmartKey back to position g in the ignition lock.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again. Avoid excessively long and frequent
attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

RThere

Z

Driving and parking

Deactivating or activating the ECO
start/stop function

127

Driving and parking

128

DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
discharged.
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 278).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
smoothly and is misfircomponent of the engine management system.
ing.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
gauge shows a value
longer being cooled sufficiently.
above 248 ‡ (120 †).
X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
The coolant warning
cool down.
lamp may also be on and
X Check the coolant level (Y page 260). Observe the warning notes
a warning tone may
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
sound.

DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the
drive program. Depending on the drive program
selected the following vehicle characteristics
will change:
Rthe drive (engine and transmission management)
Rthe suspension (vehicles with damping system or AMG adaptive sport suspension system)
Rthe steering
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
Rthe climate control:
Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is
activated. For further information about starting
the engine, see (Y page 125).

X

Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the desired drive
program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display. After five seconds the
display goes out and the status icon of the
selected drive program appears.

In addition, the current drive program settings
are displayed briefly in the multimedia system
display.
i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated at the factory due to the
available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
start/stop function is not available in any
drive program, regardless of the display in the
multimedia system display.
Available drive programs:
C Comfort

Comfortable and economical driving characteristics

S Sport

Sporty driving characteristics

I Individual

Individual settings

E Economy

Particularly economical
driving characteristics

Additional information for drive programs
(Y page 134).
You can also change gear yourself using the
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further information on the manual drive program
(Y page 136).

DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change
the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change:
Rthe drive
Rthe transmission management
RESP®
Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG adaptive
sport suspension system)
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
Rthe availability of gliding mode
Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is
activated. For further information about starting
the engine, see (Y page 125).

Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many
times as necessary until the desired drive
program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display. After five seconds the
display goes out and the status icon of the
selected drive program appears.
The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : lights up in red.
Available drive programs:

X

I Individual

Individual settings

C Comfort

Comfort-oriented, optimum-economy engine and
transmission settings

S Sport

Sporty engine and transmission settings

S+ Sport Plus

Particularly sporty transmission settings

Race

Maximum sportiness and
engine and transmission
settings suitable for the
racetrack

Additional information for drive programs
(Y page 134).
You can also change gear yourself using the
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further information on the manual drive program
(Y page 136).

Z

129

Driving and parking

DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

130

Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission

Driving and parking

Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.

The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its
original position. The current transmission position j, k, i or h is shown in the transmission position display in the multifunction display
(Y page 130).

Transmission position and drive program display
The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display.

G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.

DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions

: Transmission position
; Gear
= Drive program display

The arrows in the transmission position display
show how and into which transmission positions
you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position h and
drive program E or S.

Engaging park position P
! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle

Park position with parking lock
Reverse gear
Neutral
Drive
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of
the steering column.
For information on the selector lever in
Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 132).

j
k
i
h

is coasting, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from h to k, from k to h
or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the
direction of arrow j.
Transmission position display j is shown in
the multifunction display.
When you have engaged park position j, make
sure that the transmission position display
shows j in the multifunction display.
You can only engage park position j when the
vehicle is stationary.
Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT
SELECT lever up or down disengages the parking lock. The transmission is in neutral i.

Automatic transmission

Rdepress

the brake pedal and
the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
past the first point of resistance

Rpush

Engaging park position P automatically
Park position j is automatically engaged if:
Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey

and remove the SmartKey

Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey

or using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door or front-passenger door
Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary or when driving at a very low speed
and the transmission is in position h or k
Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts to transmission position j automatically if the HOLD function or Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 157) and
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 154).

Engaging reverse gear R
! Only move the automatic transmission to
k when the vehicle is stationary.

Depress the brake and keep it pressed.
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
The ECO start/stop function is not available
when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function
(Y page 126).
X

X

Shifting to neutral N
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen

the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease

the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Rshifting

If the transmission is in position h or k:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to
the first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position k or h, the automatic transmission shifts to i automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic
transmission shifts to j automatically.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
the automatic transmission shifts to j automatically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a
towing system:
X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:
remove the Start-Stop button from the ignition lock.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Engage neutral i.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
X

Z

Driving and parking

At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡
(Ò20†), you can only shift out of park position
j into another transmission position when the
engine is running.
In order to shift from park position j directly
into k or h:

131

Automatic transmission

132

Engaging drive position D

Engaging park position P

If the transmission is in position k or i:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the
first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever down past the first point of resistance.

Driving and parking

X

Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Overview of transmission positions

X

When the vehicle is stationary, press button :.

Engaging reverse gear R
! Only move the automatic transmission to
k when the vehicle is stationary.

X
X

j
k
i
h

Park position with parking lock
Reverse gear
Neutral
Drive

Transmission position and drive program display
The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position display
; Drive program display

If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position h and
drive program C or S.

Depress the brake and keep it pressed.
Push the selector lever forwards past the first
point of resistance.

Transmission positions
B

C

Park position
This prevents the vehicle from rolling
away when stopped.
Only shift the transmission to position j when the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be
used as a brake when parking.
Always apply the electronic parking
brake in addition to the parking lock
in order to secure the vehicle.
In the event of a malfunction of the
vehicle's electronics, the transmission may lock in position j. Have
the vehicle electronics checked
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Park position j is automatically
engaged if:
Ryou switch off the engine using the
SmartKey and remove the SmartKey
Ryou switch off the engine using the
SmartKey or using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door
or front-passenger door
Ryou open the driver's door when
the vehicle is stationary or when
driving at a very low speed and the
transmission is in position h or
k
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into position k when the vehicle is stationary.

A

Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to i
while driving. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you to
move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push
it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position i if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.
on icy roads.
If you switch the engine off with the
transmission in position k or h,
the automatic transmission shifts to
i automatically.

! Coasting in neutral i may

cause damage to the drive train.

7

Drive
The automatic transmission changes
gear automatically. All forward gears
are available.

Driving tips
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts through the
individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position h. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by:
Rthe selected drive program
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts

Z

133

Driving and parking

Automatic transmission

134

Automatic transmission
Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients

Driving and parking

G WARNING
If the clutch overheats, the electronic management system is automatically deactivated.
This interrupts the power transmission. The
vehicle may, for example, roll backwards on
gradients. There is a risk of an accident.
Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients by depressing the accelerator.
The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehicle
stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the
accelerator pedal. If the clutch overheats, a
warning tone sounds.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the Stop Vehicle Shift to 'P'
Leave Engine Running display message
appears in the multifunction display. You will
only be able to continue your journey once the
clutch has cooled down and the display message in the multifunction display has disappeared.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Trans. Oil
Overheated Drive on with Care display
message appears in the multifunction display.
Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator pedal.
Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary on
uphill gradients by:
Rdepressing the brake pedal
Ractivating the HOLD function
Rengaging the electric parking brake

Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to
use kickdown in the automatic drive program
and the temporary manual drive program M.
When manual drive program M is permanently
activated, kickdown is not possible.

For further information on kickdown in manual
drive program M (Y page 138).

Rocking the vehicle free
Shifting back and forth between transmission
positions h and k can help to free up the
vehicle if it gets stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine management system limits the
speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when
shifting back and forth. To shift repeatedly
between transmission positions h and k,
move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down
past the point of resistance.

Drive programs
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
Drive program C (Comfort)
Drive program C is characterized by the following:
Rthe

vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
pedal is depressed fully.
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
example on slippery road surfaces.
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.

Drive program S (Sport)
Drive program S is characterized by the following:
Rsporty

engine settings.
automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.

Rthe

Automatic transmission

Rthe

drive (engine and transmission management)
Rthe suspension (vehicles with damping system or AMG adaptive sport suspension system)
Rthe steering
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
Rthe climate control
Information about configuring drive program I
with the multimedia system can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual.

i To permanently select the gears in drive

program I using the steering wheel paddle
shifters, select the M (manual) setting for the
drive.

Drive program E (Economy)
Drive program E is characterized by the following:
Rcomfort-oriented

engine settings.
fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
pedal is depressed fully.
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
example on slippery road surfaces.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven
at lower engine speeds and the wheels being
less likely to spin.
Rgliding mode is activated automatically when
engine-internal conditions are fulfilled and
the accelerator is not depressed. At the same
time the transmission’s clutch opens and the
vehicle rolls freely using its kinetic energy. As
a result great distances can be completed
without the engine brake and fuel consumption reduced.
Roptimal

i The availability of gliding mode depends on
various factors, including the following:
Rthe engine and transmission temperature
Rthe downhill gradient
Rthe vehicle speed
Rperforming regular adaptation functions

When you depress the brake pedal, gliding
mode is deactivated, depending on pedal
pressure.
When you activate cruise control or Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC, gliding mode is not available.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of the
drive program can be selected:
Rthe

drive (engine management)
transmission management
Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG adaptive
sport suspension system)
RESP®
Information about configuring drive program I
with the multimedia system can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual.
Rthe

Drive program C (Comfort)
Drive program C is characterized by the following:
Rthe

vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
pedal is depressed fully.
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
example on slippery road surfaces.
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
Rgliding mode is available.
Rthe ECO start/stop function is available.

Drive program S (Sport)
Drive program S is characterized by the following:
Rthe

vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics.
Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
Rthe suspension exhibits stiff springing and
damping settings (vehicles with AIR adaptive
sport suspension system).
Z

Driving and parking

Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of the
drive program can be selected:

135

136

Automatic transmission
Rgliding

Rthe

mode is not available.
ECO start/stop function is not available.

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
Drive program S+ is characterized by the following:

Driving and parking

Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving

characteristics.
automatic transmission shifts up later.
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff
springing and damping settings (vehicles with
AMG adaptive sport suspension system).
Rgliding mode is not available.
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.
Rthe

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shifting, you have two options:
Rtemporary setting
Rpermanent setting
If you activate manual gearshifting, the multifunction display will show the current gear
instead of transmission position h.
If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears
will be selected automatically.

Temporary setting

Drive program RACE (vehicles with AMG
adaptive sport suspension system)
The RACE drive program is characterized by the
following:
Rthe

vehicle exhibits driving characteristics
suitable for the racetrack.
Rall vehicle systems are set for maximum
sportiness.
Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly hard
springing and damping settings.
Rgliding mode is not available.
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.

Manual gear shifting
General notes
You can change gear yourself using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be
in position h to do this.
Depending on which steering wheel paddle
shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
up, if permitted.

To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
position h.
X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.

X

Temporary setting will be active for a certain
amount of time. Under certain conditions the
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the
case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun
phase or when driving on steep terrain.
X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ; and hold it in place.
or
X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position.
or
X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change
the drive program.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the DYNAMIC
SELECT controller to change the drive program.

Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)

X

To activate: shift the selector lever to h.
Press button :.

X

To deactivate: press button :.

X

or
X

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if the maximum engine speed on the
currently engaged gear is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to
prevent engine damage.
X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting.
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine
speed when shifting down, the automatic
transmission protects against engine damage
by not shifting down.

Shift recommendation

If position D (automatic transmission) is
selected for the transmission in drive program I: shift to drive program I with the
DYNAMIC SELECT controller.

Shifting gears
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic

transmission does not shift up automatically
even when the engine limiting speed for the
current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.

The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X Shift to recommended gear ; according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown in
the multifunction display.

Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
! In manual mode, the automatic transmis-

sion does not shift up automatically even
when the engine limiting speed for the current
gear is reached. When the engine limiting
speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.

X

To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
Z

137

Driving and parking

Automatic transmission

Refueling

Driving and parking

138

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display.
X Shift to recommended gear : when message ; is shown in the multifunction display.

During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
the steering wheel paddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the
maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to
use kickdown in temporary manual drive program M. When manual drive program M is permanently activated, kickdown is not possible.

Kickdown
For maximum acceleration, depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.

X

Problems with the transmission
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The transmission has
problems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.

The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.
is deteriorating.
X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position j.
ger shifts into all of the
X Switch off the engine.
gears.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
Reverse gear can no lonX
Shift the transmission to position h.
ger be engaged.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.

Refueling
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.

You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.

G WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.

Refueling

away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge
could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 315).

RWash

G WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.

Refueling
General information
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 138).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked/locked automatically when you unlock/lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow on the
filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted

surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.

! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.
The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system
could otherwise be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.

:
;
=
?

To open the fuel filler flap
Tire pressure table
To insert the fuel filler cap
Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled

Switch off the engine.
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS‑GO
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
g. This is the same as the SmartKey being
removed from the ignition.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X

X

Z

Driving and parking

You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:

139

Refueling

140

Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and
remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the
inside of fuel filler flap =.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.

Driving and parking

X

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak
out.

Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 206).
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (Y page 224).
For further information on warning and indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster, see
(Y page 224).

Closing the fuel filler flap
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
X

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position g. This is the same as
the SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 70).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 77).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Automatic transmission
X

Apply the electric parking brake.

X

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): shift the transmission to position j.

X

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press button :.

Rrelease

the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rshift

! Always secure the vehicle correctly against

rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.
Rthe transmission must be in position j and
the transmission position display must show
j in the multifunction display.
Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock.
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front
wheels must be turned towards the curb.

With the SmartKey : turn the SmartKey to
position g in the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X With the Start/Stop button: press the
Start/Stop button (Y page 122).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
If the driver's door is closed, this is the same
as key position 1. If the driver's door is open,
this is the same as key position g, i.e. the
SmartKey having been removed.
If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position k or h, the automatic transmission shifts to i automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove
X

Z

Driving and parking

Parking

141

Driving and parking

142

Parking
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic
transmission shifts to j automatically.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
the automatic transmission shifts to j automatically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a
towing system:
X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:
remove the Start-Stop button from the ignition lock.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Engage neutral i.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.

The function of the electric parking brake is
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or there is a malfunction in
the system, it may not be possible to apply the
released parking brake.
If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling
away.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
X

It may not be possible to release an applied
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
The electric parking brake performs a function
test at regular intervals while the engine is
switched off. The sounds that can be heard while
this is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

Electric parking brake
General notes
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease

the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

X

To engage: push handle :.
When the electric parking brake is applied,
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
The electric parking brake can also be applied
when the SmartKey is removed.

X

To release: pull handle :.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
goes out.
The electric parking brake can only be
released:
Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 122) or
Rif the ignition was switched on using the
Start/Stop button

Rshift

Applying automatically
The electric parking brake is automatically
applied when the transmission is in position j
and:
Rthe engine is switched off or
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
To prevent the electric parking brake from being
automatically applied, pull handle :.
The electric parking brake is also engaged automatically if:
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle
to a standstill or
Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary
RParking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary
In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine is switched off
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
Rthere is a system malfunction
Rthe power supply is insufficient
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only)
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes
out.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.

Releasing automatically
Your vehicle's electric parking brake is automatically released if all of the following conditions are met:
Rthe engine is running
Rthe transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or shift
from position j to h or k
Rthe seat belt has been fastened
if the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid
must be closed.

If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
release the electric parking brake:
Rthe driver's door is closed
Ryou are shifting from transmission position
j or have previously driven at speeds
greater than 2 mph (3 km/h)
Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator
pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the parking
brake will be released and the vehicle will start
to move.

Emergency braking
The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake.
X While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake (Y page 142).
The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
handle : of the electric parking brake
pressed. The longer the electric parking brake
handle : is depressed, the greater the braking force.
During braking:
Ra warning tone sounds
Rthe Release Parking Brake message
appears
Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek
advice.

i You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist workshop.

Z

143

Driving and parking

Parking

144

Driving tips
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes

Driving and parking

G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equipment when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while
driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.

Drive sensibly – save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
RThe tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure.
RRemove unnecessary loads.
RRemove roof racks when they are not needed.
RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.
RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.
RHave all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the Main-

tenance Booklet or by the service interval display.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving
G WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

Emission control
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. Always have
work on the engine carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized MercedesBenz Center for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine settings must not be changed under
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
service work must be carried out at regular
intervals and in accordance with the MercedesBenz service requirements. Details can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.

Driving tips

The ECO display shows you how economical
your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
in achieving the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption.

The ECO display consists of three sections, with
an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories:
:

Rthe outer area fills up and the inner

area lights up green: moderate
acceleration, especially at higher
speeds
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: sporty acceleration
;

:
;
=
?

Acceleration
Coasting
Constant
Additional range achieved

Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and
represents the additional range achieved since
the beginning of the journey as a result of an
adapted driving style.
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve
range, the Fuel Low message is shown in the
multifunction display instead of range ?. The
8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster
also lights up (Y page 224).

Acceleration (evaluation of the
acceleration processes):

Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes):
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner

area lights up green: anticipatory
driving, keeping your distance and
early release of the accelerator.
The vehicle can coast without use
of the brakes.
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: frequent heavy
braking

=

Constant (continuous evaluation
over the entire journey):
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner

area lights up green: constant
speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed

The three inner areas display the current driving
style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the
driving situation, up to two areas may light up
simultaneously.
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer
areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more
economical driving style. If the three outer areas
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
has adopted the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel
consumption. The additionally achieved range
displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not
indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
Z

Driving and parking

ECO display

145

Driving and parking

146

Driving tips
In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as:
RLoad
RTire pressure
RCold start
RChoice of route
RActive electrical consumers
These factors are not included in the ECO display.
An economical driving style specially requires
driving at moderate engine speeds.
Achieving a higher value in the categories
"Acceleration" and "Constant":
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E
(vehicles with a DYNAMIC SELECT button).
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the
highway, only the outer area for "constant" will
change.
The ECO display summarizes the driving style
from the start of the journey to its completion.
Therefore, there are more marked changes in
the outer areas at the start of a journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more
marked changes, perform a manual rest
(Y page 181).
For more information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 180).

Braking
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
! On long and steep gradients, you must

reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a
lower gear in good time. This allows you to
take advantage of engine braking. For this you
must first activate manual gearshifting. This

helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and
wearing them out excessively.
When you take advantage of engine braking, it
is possible that a drive wheel will not rotate for
some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface.
This could cause damage to the drive train.
This type of damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on
downhill gradients while the manual drive program M is temporarily activated: the automatic
transmission may switch to the last active automatic drive program E or S. The automatic transmission may shift to a higher gear. This can
reduce the engine's braking effect.

Heavy and light loads
G WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantly

results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive
on for a short while. This allows the airflow to
cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
and protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salttreated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake
pads. This can result in a significantly longer
braking distance.
RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the
brakes occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions.
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.

Servicing the brakes
! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:
Rif

the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and
Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is
running
Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop to
arrange this.

If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals.
You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)
on (Y page 61).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have
brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle
which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz
vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent
quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have
not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles
or which are not of an equivalent quality could
affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
brake fluid that has been specially approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
fluid which has not been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.

Checking brake lining thickness
You can measure the break pad/lining thickness using a test gage. Color-coding (green or
red) on the test gage allows you to determine
whether the brake pad/lining thickness is still
sufficient. The test gage is in the vehicle document wallet in the glove box.

! A function or performance test should only

be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If
you wish to operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake
system.

! As the ESP® system operates automatically,

the engine and the ignition must be switched
off (the SmartKey must be in position u or
1 in the ignition lock), if the electric parking
brake is tested on a braking dynamometer
(maximum 10 seconds).
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may
cause severe damage to the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brake
system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Front wheel

Z

147

Driving and parking

Driving tips

Driving tips

148

Driving on wet roads

Driving and parking

Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if:
Ryou drive at low speeds
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
Rlower your speed
Ravoid ruts
Ravoid sudden steering movements
Rbrake carefully
Rear wheel
Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable
position so that you can attach test gage A.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 141).
X Engage park position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Place test gage A between the wheel's
spokes on brake pad/lining =.
X Hold test gage A vertically on brake disc :
and slide measuring pin ; onto brake
disc :.
X Check which color field ? the arrow on
measuring pin ; is pointing to.
Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is sufficient.
Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not
sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
To avoid an inaccurate measurement:
X

Rmake

sure you position the wheels suitably
not put the measuring pin on a recess in
the brake disc

Rdo

Driving on flooded roads
! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check

the depth of any water before driving through
it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or
the engine compartment. This can damage
the electronic components in the engine or
the automatic transmission. Water can also
be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles
and this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.

G DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.

If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and
braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X Shift the transmission to position N.
X Try to bring the vehicle under control using
corrective steering.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
point do not guarantee that the road surface is
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
wooded areas or on bridges.
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (Y page 290).
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 289).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 289).

engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly.
When the engine is running, you can use the
cruise control lever to limit the speed to any
speed between 20 mph (30 km/h) and the technically permitted maximum speed of the vehicle.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady
speed for a prolonged period.
The speed indicated in the speedometer may
differ slightly from the speed stored.

Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control
cannot take into account the road, traffic and
weather conditions. Cruise control is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use cruise control:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

Driving systems
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. On long and steep
downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is
laden, you must select a low gear in good time.
You need to shift manually using the steering
wheel paddle shifters beforehand. By doing so,
you will make use of the braking effect of the

: Activates or increases speed
; Activates or reduces speed

Z

149

Driving and parking

Driving systems

150

Driving systems
= Deactivates cruise control
? Activates at the current speed/last stored

Driving and parking

speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display for
five seconds.

Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
Rthe transmission must be in position h.

Storing, maintaining and calling up a
speed
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or
down ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling up the
last stored speed

G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed.

X

Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for
a lower speed.
X

To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : to the pressure
point for a higher speed, or down ; for a
lower speed.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if you

depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if
you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise control:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards
=.
or
X Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Ryou shift the transmission to position i
while driving
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐
trol Off message in the multifunction display
for approximately five seconds.

Driving systems
speed stored is cleared.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
General notes
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed
and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles
are detected with the aid of the radar sensor
system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes automatically to avoid exceeding the set speed or to
maintain the designated distance from the vehicle in front.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is
a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually
and acoustically. Without your intervention, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then
sound and the distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately
in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in
front or take evasive action provided it is safe to
do so.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph
(200 km/h).
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you
will make use of the braking effect of the engine.
This relieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC on roads
with steep gradients.
For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must be
operational.
Since Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radar
waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of
the responsible authorities. You can refer to the
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approved by

the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The
radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do

not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to:
Rpeople

or animals

Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped

or parked vehicles
vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may
neither give warnings nor intervene in such
situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Roncoming

G WARNING
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always
clearly identify other road users and complex
traffic situations.
In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may:
Rgive

an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.

Z

Driving and parking

i When you switch off the engine, the last

151

152

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
warns you.

G WARNING
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle
with up to 50% of the maximum possible
deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you
with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a
risk of an accident.
Apply the brakes yourself in these situations
and try to take evasive action.
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the

HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in your lane.
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
vehicles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is snow or heavy rain

Rthere

is interference by other radar sources
are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a
vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate
to the speed stored.
This speed may:
Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or
an exit lane
Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand lane
that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand
lane
Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving in the right lane
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Rthere

Cruise control lever

Stores the current speed or a higher speed
Stores the current speed or a lower speed
Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Stores the current speed or calls up the last
stored speed
A Sets a specified minimum distance
:
;
=
?

Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activation conditions

! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the

HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash

Driving systems

Activating
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?, up : or down ;.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or
down ; until the desired speed is set.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
i If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the Distance Pilot Suspended message appears in the multifunction display. The
set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in
front will then not be maintained. You will be
driving at the speed you determine by the
position of the accelerator pedal.
You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
when stationary. The lowest speed that can be
set is 20 mph (30 km/h).

X

Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activating at the current speed/last
stored speed

G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you

do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed.
X

Pulling away and driving
If you want to pull away with Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
or
X If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated:
accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to
the set speed.
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all
times.
If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise
control.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slowermoving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In
this way, the distance you have selected is maintained.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a fastermoving vehicle in front, it increases the driving
speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated
up to the speed you have stored.
X

i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated

when you depress the brake, except when the
vehicle is stationary.

Selecting the drive program
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty
driving style when you select the S+ drive program (Y page 134) or the manual drive program
(Y page 136). Acceleration behind the vehicle in
front or to the set speed is then noticeably more
dynamic. If you have selected the E (MercedesAMG vehicles: C) drive program, the vehicle
Z

Driving and parking

To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to
two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is ready for use.
Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
RParking Pilot must not be activated.
Rthe transmission must be in position h.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from j to h or your seat belt must be
fastened.
Rthe front-passenger door must be closed.
Rthe vehicle must not skid.

153

154

Driving systems
accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic.
If when driving on multilane roads you wish to
change to the overtaking lane, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC supports you if:
Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is maintaining the
distance to a vehicle in front
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently
detect a danger of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if
changing lanes takes too long or if the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
becomes too small.

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
The last stored speed increases or decreases
in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ;
beyond the pressure point.
The last stored speed increases or decreases
in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.

Stopping

i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated

Changing lanes

Driving and parking

Setting a speed

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the
vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle
until it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake.

i After a time, the electric parking brake

secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.

i Depending on the specified minimum dis-

tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at
a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
front. The specified minimum distance is set
using the control on the cruise control lever.
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated,
the transmission is shifted automatically to
position j if:
Rthe

driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
activated when the vehicle is stationary and:
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is insufficient.
If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may
also shift to position j automatically.

if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you
accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Setting a specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance for
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time
span between one and two seconds. With this
function you can set the minimum distance that
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You
can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 161).
The specified minimum distance can be
changed while Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
switched on or off.

i Make sure that you maintain the minimum

distance to the vehicle in front as required by
law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front
if necessary.

To increase: turn control = in direction ;.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
greater distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
X To decrease: turn control = in direction :.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
shorter distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.

X

Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

DISTRONIC is not deactivated if you depress
the accelerator pedal.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the
vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in position j, k or i
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you
in order to pull away and the front-passenger
door or one of the rear doors is open
Rthe vehicle is skidding
Ryou switch on Parking Pilot
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically
deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. The
Distance Pilot Off message appears in the
multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is also automatically
deactivated when you activate DSR. The Ã
DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in
the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer

There are several ways to deactivate Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
X

or

Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :.

X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,
the Distance Pilot Off message appears in
the multifunction display for approximately five
seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine. Distance Pilot

When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and there are no vehicles detected in front,
one or two segments ; in the set speed range
light up.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front = and stored speed : light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed in

the speedometer may differ slightly from the
speed set for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
Z

155

Driving and parking

Driving systems

Driving systems

156

Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
deactivated
In the Assistance menu (Y page 184) of the onboard computer, you can select the assistance
display.

X

Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 185).

Tips for driving with Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC

Driving and parking

General notes

: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front

= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable

? Your vehicle
X

Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 185).

Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
activated
You will initially see the stored speed for about
five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC.

: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable

= Your vehicle
? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC active (text only

appears when the cruise control lever is
actuated)

Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect
vehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
RDriving on a different line: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are
not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
ROther vehicles changing lanes: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be
too short.
RNarrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
has not yet detected the vehicle in front on
the edge of the road because of its narrow
width. The distance to the vehicle in front will
be too short.
RObstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for
them.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC may mistakenly
detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. If
you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the
following situations, the vehicle could pull
away unintentionally:
- At traffic lights with crossing traffic, for
example.
- With a vehicle ahead on the other side of an
intersection and the HOLD function active.
In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.

Driving systems

General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
Rwhen waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe vehicle is stationary
Rthe engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
fastened
Rthe electric parking brake is released
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
Rthe transmission is in position h, k or i
on vehicles with automatic transmission

Activating the HOLD function

G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere

is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.

! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the

HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 157).

Make sure that the activation conditions are
met.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until : appears in the multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.

X

i If depressing the brake pedal the first time
does not activate the HOLD function, wait
briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically
if:
Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
transmission: only when the transmission is in
position h or k.
Rthe transmission is in position j on vehicles
with automatic transmission.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until : disappears
from the multifunction display.
Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake.

Z

Driving and parking

HOLD function

157

Driving systems

158

Driving and parking

i After a time, the electric parking brake

secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is automatically shifted to position j
if:
Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is insufficient.

Start-off Assist (except MercedesAMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you use start-off assist, individual wheels
may start to spin and the vehicle may skid. If
ESP® is deactivated, there is a greater danger
of skidding and having an accident. Make sure
that no persons or obstacles are in the vicinity
of the vehicle.
Start-off assist enables optimum acceleration
from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip
road surface is required, along with the tires and
vehicle being in proper operating condition.
Do not activate start-off assist on public roads.
Observe the safety notes on driving safety systems (Y page 61).
Be sure to read the safety notes and information
on ESP® (Y page 64).

Activating start-off assist
ESP® (Y

Deactivate
page 185).
Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead
position.
X Depress the brake pedal hard with your left
foot and keep it depressed.
X Shift the transmission to position D.
X

X

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to select
the S drive program (Y page 128).
X Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the acceleration
process has ended. ESP® will otherwise not
be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle
starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
Canceling start-off assist
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
X Reactivate ESP®.

X

RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
i RACE START must not be used on normal

roads. RACE START must only be activated
and used on dedicated road circuits, outside
of public road use.

i RACE START is only available in
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles.

G WARNING
If you use RACE START, individual tires may
start to spin and the vehicle could skid.
Depending on the selected ESP® mode, there
is an increased risk of skidding and having an
accident. Make sure that no persons, animals
or obstacles are within range of the vehicle.
RACE START enables optimal acceleration from
a standing start. For this, a suitably high-grip
road surface is required and the vehicle and tires
must be in good working order.

i Observe the safety notes on driving safety

systems (Y page 61).
Be sure to read the safety notes and information on ESP® (Y page 64).

Conditions for activation
You can activate RACE START if:
Rthe doors, hood and the trunk lid are closed.
Rthe engine is running and the transmission,
all-wheel drive clutch and the engine are at
operating temperature.
Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position.
Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is
depressed (left foot).
Rthe transmission is in position h.
Rdrive program S, S+ or RACE is selected
(Y page 129)

Activating RACE START
Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
and keep it depressed.
X Pull and hold both steering wheel paddle shifters.
X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP
Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in
the multifunction display.
X Release both steering wheel paddle shifters.
i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE
START Not Possible See Operator's
Manual message appears in the multifunction
display.
X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 136).
or
X To confirm: pull the right steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 136).
The RACE START Available Depress gas
pedal message appears in the multifunction
display.
i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal
within a few seconds, RACE START is canceled. The multifunction display shows the
RACE START Canceled message.
X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The engine speed is increased.
The RACE START Release brake to start
message appears in the multifunction display.
i If you do not release the brake pedal within
a short time, RACE START will be canceled.
X

The multifunction display shows the RACE
START Canceled message.
X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration.
The RACE START Active message appears in
the multifunction display.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h.
RACE START is deactivated immediately if you
release the accelerator pedal during RACE
START or if any of the activation conditions are
no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐
sible See Operator's Manual or RACE
START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a

short period of time, it is only available again
after the vehicle has been driven a certain
distance.

AMG adaptive sport suspension system
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection of Sport or Comfort
The suspension setting is adjusted using the
corresponding button in the center console.

i The mode can also be set using the AMG

DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 129).
Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is
activated. For further information about starting
the engine, see (Y page 125).

Z

159

Driving and parking

Driving systems

160

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Sport mode

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
Sport mode ensures even better contact with
the road. Select this mode when employing a
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country
roads.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected
Sport mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.

Comfort mode
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of
your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this
mode if you favor a more comfortable driving
style, but also when driving fast on straight
roads, e.g. highways.
X Press button : again so that indicator
lamp ; goes out.
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.

4MATIC
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.

This may damage the differential. Damage of
this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain
either on the ground or be fully raised.
Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the
ground.

4MATIC, together with ESP®, improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel
spins due to insufficient grip.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
your lane.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
RAccelerate less when driving.

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum

effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains
if necessary.

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL
General notes
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL offers improved
driving comfort and continuously controls the
calibration of the dampers. The
damping characteristics adapt to the current
operating and driving situation.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Rthe road surface conditions
Rthe drive program selected
The drive program can be set using the
DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 128).

Selecting Comfort mode
In the Comfort drive program, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this drive program if you
prefer a more comfortable driving style. Also
select the Comfort drive program when driving
fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches
of highway.
X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 128)
as many times as necessary until the Comfort drive program is selected.

Driving systems

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
the Sport drive program ensures even better
contact with the road. Select this drive program
when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on
winding country roads.
X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 128)
as many times as necessary until the Sport
drive program is selected.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audibly indicates the distance between your
vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
exiting a parking space. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/
leaving parking spaces.

! When parking, pay particular attention to

objects above or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of the
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the
objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck or
a pneumatic drill could cause Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function
correctly on uneven terrain.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshift the transmission to position h, k or
i
Rrelease the electric parking brake

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

Range of the sensors
General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located:
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects.
Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of trucks.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side

(example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.
They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean
the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch
or damage them (Y page 265).

Z

Driving and parking

Selecting Sport mode

161

162

Driving systems
Warning displays

Driving and parking

Range

: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle

; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-

cle

= Segments showing operational readiness

: Detection range of front sensors
; Detection range of rear sensors

Front sensors
Center

Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)

Corners

Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)

Rear sensors
Center

Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)

Corners

Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm)

Minimum distance

The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located on
the dashboard above the center air vents. The
warning display for the rear area is located on
the headliner in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness =
light up.
The gear lever position or the transmission position of the automatic transmission and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
Transmission posi- Warning display
tion
h

Front area activated

Center

Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

k, i or the vehicle Rear and front areas
is rolling backwards activated

Corners

Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

j

If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown.

No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. In addition,
warning tones are issued.
When the distance to the obstacle is sufficient,
you will hear an intermittent warning tone. The
shorter the distance to the obstacle, the shorter
the frequency of the intermittent warning tones

Driving systems

Deactivating or activating Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp : is lit, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deactivated.

i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-

cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.

Driving and parking

becomes. When the minimum distance is
reached, you hear a continuous warning tone.

: Indicator lamp
; Deactivates or activates Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Problem

163

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deactithe Parking Assist
vated.
PARKTRONIC warning
X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
displays are lit. You also
qualified specialist workshop.
hear a warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the indicator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments in The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interthe Parking Assist
ference.
PARKTRONIC warning
X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 265).
displays are lit. Parking
X Switch the ignition back on.
Assist PARKTRONIC is
then deactivated.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves.
X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different
location.

Z

164

Driving systems
Parking Pilot

Driving and parking

General notes
Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides
of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention
and brake application can assist you during
parking and when exiting a parking space. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is also available
(Y page 161).

Important safety notes
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking
space. Make sure that no persons, animals or
objects are in the maneuvering range.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.

G WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
result in a collision with another road user.
There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot
parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-

cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
wheels or tires.
Parking Pilot may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.:
Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
Ron unsuitable surfaces
Parking tips:
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking
space as possible.
RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown
might be identified or measured incorrectly.
RParking spaces that are partially occupied by
trailer drawbars might not be identified as
such or be measured incorrectly.

RSnowfall

or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately.
RPay attention to the warning messages of
Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC during the parking
procedure (Y page 162).
RYou can intervene to correct the steering procedure at any time. Parking Pilot will then be
canceled.
RWhen transporting a load that protrudes from
your vehicle, you must not use Parking Pilot.
RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are
mounted.
RMake sure that the tire pressures are always
correct. This has a direct influence on the
parking characteristics of the vehicle.
Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:
Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the direction of travel
Ron straight roads, not bends
Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
pavement

Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the detection range of
Parking Pilot will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into
account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or
loading ramps. Parking Pilot may therefore
guide you into the parking space too early.
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
spaces perpendicular to the direction of travel if:
Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next
to one another
Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low curb
Ryou forward-park
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
spaces parallel or perpendicular to the direction
of travel if:
Rthe parking space is on a curb
Rthe system reads the parking space as being
blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks
Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into
Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
For further information on the detection range
(Y page 161).

G WARNING
If there are objects above the detection range:
RParking

Pilot may steer in too early
vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects
You may cause a collision as a result. There is
a risk of an accident.
If objects are located above the detection
range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot.
Rthe

soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is
activated. When parking on the driver's side,
this must remain activated until you confirm the
use of Parking Pilot by pressing the a button
on the multifunction steering wheel. The system
automatically determines whether the parking
space is parallel or at right-angles to the direction of travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft
(15 m) away from it.

Parking
G WARNING
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
braked by Parking Pilot, it could roll away if:
Rthere

: Detected parking space on the left
; Parking symbol
= Detected parking space on the right

Parking Pilot is activated automatically when
driving forward. The system is operational at
speeds of up to approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
Parking Pilot will only detect parking spaces:
Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the direction of travel
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehicle
Rat right angles to the direction of travel and at
least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle

i Note that Parking Pilot cannot measure the

length of a parking space if it is at right angles
to the direction of travel. You will need to
judge whether your vehicle will fit into the
parking space.
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When
a parking space has been detected, an arrow
towards the right or the left also appears. Parking Pilot only displays parking spaces on the
front-passenger side as standard. Parking
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as

is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle
occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
against rolling away.

i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects

obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically
whilst the vehicle is being parked. You are
responsible for braking in good time.
X Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the
instrument cluster.
X Shift the transmission to position k.
The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
pull away.
or
X To park using Parking Pilot: press the a
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
Z

165

Driving and parking

Driving systems

Driving systems

166
X

Driving and parking

X

Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
times. When backing up, drive at a speed
below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise, Parking Pilot is canceled immediately.
Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
when the vehicle approaches the rear border
of the parking space.
Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.

The Parking Pilot Active Select D
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
X Shift the transmission to position h while
the vehicle is stationary.
Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
direction.
The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
pulling away.
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
when the vehicle approaches the front border
of the parking space.
Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.
The Parking Pilot Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete,
the Parking Pilot Finished message
appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle
is now parked.
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal. The braking
effect is canceled when you depress the accelerator pedal.
Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When
Parking Pilot is finished, you must steer and
brake again yourself. Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is still available.
Parking tips:
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and
shape of the vehicles parked in front and

behind it and the conditions of the location. It
may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you
too far into a parking space, or not far enough
into it. In some cases, it may also lead you
across or onto the curb. If necessary, you
should cancel the parking procedure with
Parking Pilot.
RYou can also preselect transmission position
h. The vehicle redirects and does not drive
as far into the parking space. Should the
transmission change take place too early, the
parking procedure is canceled. A sensible
parking position can no longer be achieved
from this position.

Exiting a parking space
In order for Parking Pilot to support you when
exiting the parking space:
Ryou need to have parked using Parking Pilot.
Rthe border of the parking space must be high
enough at the front and the rear. A curb stone
is too small, for example.
Rthe border of the parking space must not be
too wide, as the position of the vehicle must
not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting
position as it is maneuvered into the parking
space.
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
(1.0 m) must be available.
Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a parking space only if you have parked the vehicle
parallel to the direction of travel using Parking
Pilot.

i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects

obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically
whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space.
You are responsible for braking in good time.
X Start the engine.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
will drive out of the parking space.
X Shift the transmission to position h or k.
The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
pull away.
or

To exit a parking space using Parking
Pilot: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is canceled immediately.
X Depending on the message or as required,
shift the transmission to position h or k.
Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
direction. The Parking Pilot Active
Accelerate and Brake Observe Sur‐
roundings message appears in the multifunction display.
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position.
X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by
the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary.
Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
Parking Pilot Finished message appears in
the multifunction display. You will then have to
steer and merge into traffic on your own. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can
take over the steering before the vehicle has
exited the parking space completely. This is
useful, for example when you recognize that it is
already possible to pull out of the parking space.
X

Canceling Parking Pilot
X

or
X

Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Parking Pilot is canceled immediately. The
Parking Pilot Canceled message appears
in the multifunction display.
Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 163).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off
and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled.
The Parking Pilot Canceled message
appears in the multifunction display.

Parking Pilot is canceled automatically when:
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged
Rtransmission position j is selected
Rparking using Parking Pilot is no longer possible
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. In
such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the
Parking Pilot Canceled message.
When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steer
and brake again yourself.
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
accelerator again.

Rear view camera
General notes

Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your
vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system display.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 265).

i The text shown in the multimedia system

display depends on the language setting. The
following are examples of rear view camera
messages in the multimedia system display.

Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible
Z

167

Driving and parking

Driving systems

Driving systems

Driving and parking

168

for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in parking spaces.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function in
a limited manner:
Rif the trunk lid is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 265)
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
case, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate holder, rear bicycle rack).

Messages in the multimedia system display
The rear view camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
The rear view camera does not show objects in
the following positions:
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rin close range above the handle on the trunk
lid

! Objects not at ground level may appear to

be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline.
Rthe

Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is
in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
function is selected in the multimedia system;
see the Digital Operator's Manual.
X Engage reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown with
guide lines in the multimedia system display.
The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to j or after
driving forwards a short distance.
X

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
; White guide line without steering input –
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)

Driving systems

169

"Reverse parking" function

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
D Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

: Front warning display
; Additional measurement operational readi-

ness indicator for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
= Rear warning display

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 162), additional measurement
operational readiness indicator ; appears in
the multimedia system display. If the Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active
or light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system display.

: White guide line without steering input –

vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
= Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 168).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
back up until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.

Z

Driving and parking

Backing up straight into a parking space
without steering input

170

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Reverse perpendicular parking with steering input

: White guide line for current steering input
; Parking space marking
: Parking space marking
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 168).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the parking
space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :.
X Maintain the steering input and reverse carefully.

X

Turn the steering wheel to the center position
while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without steering input
= End of parking space
X

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.

Back up carefully until you have reached the
final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.

Driving systems

: Symbol for the wide-angle view function
; Your vehicle
= Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-

Rif

you are predominantly driving slower than
37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph
(200 km/h)
Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rin active driving situations, such as when you
change lanes or change your speed
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue
your journey and starts assessing your tiredness
again if:
Ryou switch off the engine
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to
take a break

Displaying the attention level

plays
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
for example.

ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the
driver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It
might not always recognize fatigue or increasing
inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them
at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all:
Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration

You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (Y page 184) of
the on-board computer.
X Select the Assistance display for Attention
Assist using the on-board computer
(Y page 185).
The following information is displayed:
RThe length of the journey since the last break.
RThe Attention Level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five
levels from high to low.
RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System Suspended message
appears. The bar display then changes the
display, such as when you are driving at a
speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above
125 mph (200 km/h).

Z

Driving and parking

Wide-angle function

171

Driving systems

172

Activating ATTENTION ASSIST

Driving and parking

X

Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 185).
The system determines the attention level of
the driver depending on the setting selected:

Standard selected: the sensitivity with which
the system determines the attention level is set
to normal.
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set
higher. The attention level detected by Attention
Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is
warned earlier.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,
it is automatically reactivated after the engine
has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction display
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a
Break!.
In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
X If necessary, take a break.
X Confirm the message by pressing the a
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do
not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still
detects increasing lapses in concentration, you
will be warned again after 15 minutes at the
earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of
fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system: if a warning is output in the multifunction
display, a service station search is performed in
the multimedia system. You can select a service
station and navigation to this service station will
then begin. This function can be activated or
deactivated in the multimedia system; see the
Digital Operator's Manual.

Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 172) and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 174).

Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors
draws your attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will
also receive an optical and audible warning.
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes

G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles

overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.

i USA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC as
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.

Driving systems
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.

173

Warning display

Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain or snow
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike or bicycle
Rthe road has very wide lanes
Rthe road has narrow lanes
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft
(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to it.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the
case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side
of their lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
borders.
Rwarnings may be interrupted when you are
driving alongside particularly long vehicles,
such as trucks, for a prolonged time.

: Warning display

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds
above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp
goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist
is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps
is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light.

Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of
Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone
sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn
signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :.
There are no further warning tones.

Z

Driving and parking

Radar sensors
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The
sensors must not be covered, for example by
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a
severe impact or in the event of damage to the
bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.

Driving systems

174

Switching on Blind Spot Assist
Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated
in the on-board computer (Y page 186).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.

Driving and parking

X

Lane Keeping Assist
General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
your vehicle by means of multifunction camera : which is attached behind the top of the
windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on the road and can warn you before
you leave your lane unintentionally.
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notes

G WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
detect lane markings.
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
Rgive

an unnecessary warning
give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.

Rnot

G WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if
the road surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings
for one lane, e.g. roadworks
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short
and thus the lane markings cannot be detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
the roadway

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
X

Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive (Y page 174).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphic are shown

Driving systems

175

in green (Y page 185). Lane Keeping Assist is
ready for use.

Driving and parking

If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP®.
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system detects certain conditions and
warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
Rthe system detects solid lane markings
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend

Z

176

Displays and operation

On-board computer and displays

Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the on-board computer.

G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The on-board computer only shows messages or
warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure
your vehicle is operating safely at all times.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 33).

Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lighting
The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the
instrument cluster are not illuminated.

The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can
be adjusted using the brightness control knob.
The brightness control knob is located on the
bottom left of the instrument cluster
(Y page 33).
X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or
counter-clockwise.
If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or
L position, the brightness is dependent
upon the brightness of the ambient light.

Speedometer with segments
The speedometer is divided into segments on
vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
(Y page 151):
One or two segments in the set speed range
light up.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
front moving more slowly than the stored
speed:
The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this

could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The engine is limited within a range to protect
the engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and
does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 179).

Displays and operation

Coolant temperature gauge
G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolant

temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡
(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine
will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gage is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 33).
The H marking in the coolant temperature gauge
corresponds to a coolant temperature of
approximately 248 ‡ (120 †).
Under normal operating conditions and at the
correct coolant level, the coolant temperature
gauge may rise to the H marking.

Operating the on-board computer
Overview

: Multifunction display
; Right control panel
= Left control panel
X

To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Z

On-board computer and displays

There is a short delay before a change in outside
temperature appears in the multifunction display.

177

178

Displays and operation

On-board computer and displays

Left control panel
=
;

RCalls

9
:

Press briefly:

up the menu and menu bar

RScrolls

in lists
a submenu or function
RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list
or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name
or telephone number
RSelects

9
:

Press and hold:

a

RConfirms

%

Press briefly:

RIn

the Audio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the desired frequency range, or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open
the selection or display message
the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts
dialing the selected number

RIn

RBack

RVehicles

with Audio 20: switches off voice-operated control for navigation
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND: switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions)
RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used
RExits the telephone book/redial memory
%

Press and hold:
RCalls

up the standard display in the Trip menu

Right control panel
ó

RVehicles

8

RMute

WX

RAdjusts

with Audio 20:
Switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND:
Switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions)
the volume

Menus and submenus
~

RRejects

6

RMakes

or ends a call
the telephone book/redial memory
or accepts a call
to the redial memory

RSwitches

Multifunction display

RCRUISE

Cruise control (Y page 149)
Highbeam Assist

R_ Adaptive
(Y page 102)

Rè

Rë

ECO start/stop function (Y page 126)
HOLD function (Y page 157)

Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Using the = or ; button on the steering
wheel, open the menu bar.
Operating the on-board computer (Y page 177).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
RTrip

: Permanent display: outside temperature or
;
=
?
A
B

speed (Y page 187)
Time
Text field
Menu bar
Drive program (Y page 130)
Transmission position (Y page 132)

In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, the indicators in the
lower and upper part of the multifunction display
differ from the displays shown here.
X To display menu bar ?: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
If you do not press the buttons any longer,
menu bar ? is faded out after a few seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages.

menu (Y page 180)
instructions)

RNavi menu (navigation
(Y page 181)

RAudio

menu (Y page 182)
menu (telephone) (Y page 183)
RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 184)
RServ. menu (Y page 186)
RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 186)
RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(Y page 188)
The displays for the Audio, Navi and Tel menus
may differ slightly from those in your vehicle.
The examples given in this Operator's Manual
apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND.
RTel

i Set the time using the multimedia system

(see the separate operating instructions).
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
RZ

Gearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (Y page 136)
Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 164)
Z

On-board computer and displays

RExits

179

Menus and submenus

180

Trip menu

On-board computer and displays

Standard display

X

Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; appears.

Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"

:
;
=
?

Distance
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption

Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
From Start or From Reset.

X

The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the
values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset
(Y page 181).
In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From Start:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From Reset.

ECO display
The ECO display is not available in MercedesAMG vehicles.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO
DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset.
For more information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 145).

Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only shows
range :.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press 9 or : to select the display with
approximate range : and current fuel consumption ;.
Approximate range : that can be covered is
calculated according to your current driving
style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If
there is only a small amount of fuel left in the
fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C
appears instead of approximate range :.
Recuperation display = shows you if energy
has been recuperated from the kinetic energy
in overrun mode and saved in the battery.
Recuperation display = depends on the
engine installed and is therefore not available
in all vehicles.

Menus and submenus
Digital speedometer

181

Navigation system menu

Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer ;.
A gear shift recommendation : Z can also
follow.
Observe the information on gearshift recommendation : when shifting manually
(Y page 136).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendation is shown in the status bar of the
multifunction display and not in the digital
speedometer display.

X

Resetting values
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : to select Yes and press a to
confirm.
You can reset the values of the following functions:
RTrip odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
values in the "From Start" trip computer are also
reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"
trip computer, the values in the ECO display are
also reset.
X

In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
You can find further information on navigation in
the separate multimedia system operating
instructions.
X Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel
; Current road

Route guidance active
No change of direction announced

:
;
=
?

Distance to destination
Distance to the next change of direction
Current road
"Follow the road's course" symbol

Z

On-board computer and displays

Displaying navigation instructions

On-board computer and displays

182

Menus and submenus
Change of direction without lane recommendation

Other status indicators of the navigation system

: Road into which the change of direction

The navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status.
Possible displays:

leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is to be made, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as you
approach the point of the announced change of
direction. The change of direction starts once
the distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation

RNew

Route... or Calculating Route
A new route is calculated.
RRoad Not Mapped
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.
newly built streets, car parks or private land.
RNo Route
No route could be calculated to the selected
destination.
RO
You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination.

Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
: Road into which the change of direction

leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual

distance display

= Lanes not recommended
? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction

A Change-of-direction symbol

On multilane roads, new lane recommendations
can be displayed for the next change of direction
if the digital map supports this data. During the
change of direction, new lanes may be added.
Lane not recommended =: you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you
stay in this lane.
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction ?: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane.

: Active station list
; Station frequency with memory position

The multifunction display shows station ; with
station frequency or station name. The preset
position is only displayed along with station ; if
this has been stored.
X Switch on the multimedia system and select
Radio (see the separate operating instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Audio menu.

Menus and submenus
Video DVD operation

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a

normal radio.
You can find further information on operation
in the "Satellite radio" section of the separate
multimedia system operating instructions.

Operating an audio player or audio
media

: Current title

Audio data from various audio devices or media
can be played, depending on the equipment
installed in the vehicle.
X Switch on the multimedia system and then
audio CD or MP3 mode (see the separate
operating instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous track: briefly
press the 9 or : button.
X To select a track from the track list (rapid
scrolling): press and hold the 9 or :
button until desired track appears.
If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid
scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio
drives or data carriers support this function.
If track information is stored on the audio device
or medium, the multifunction display will show
the number and title of the track.

You can only operate DVD videos in the Audio
menu in vehicles with COMAND.
X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD
(see the separate operating instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene :
appears.

Telephone menu
Introduction
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer’s operating instructions).
X Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions).

Z

On-board computer and displays

To select a preset list or station list: press
and briefly hold the 9 or : button until
the preset list or station list in the desired
frequency range is shown.
X To select a station: briefly press 9
or :.
X

183

Menus and submenus

184

Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the multimedia system; see the separate operating
instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display:

On-board computer and displays

X

RTelephone

READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive.
RTelephone No service: there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching for
a network.

Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel
menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display.
You can accept a call at any time, even if you are
not in the Tel menu.
X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
to accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a call
You can end or reject a call anytime, even if you
are not in the Tel menu.
X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
to reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone book
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X Authorize access to the phone book on the
phone.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name.
or
X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the
9 or : button for longer than one second.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored for
a name: press the 6 or a button to
start dialing.
or
X

If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
or
X If you do not want to make a call: press the
~ or % button.
X

Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names or
numbers dialed in the redial memory.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
memory.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
or
X If you do not want to make the call: press
the ~ or % button.

Assistance menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
DriveAssist menu:
RDisplaying the assistance graphic
(Y page 185)
RDeactivating/activating ESP® (except
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) (Y page 185)
RActivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
(Y page 185)
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 185)
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 186)
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 186)

Menus and submenus
Displaying the assistance graphic

Start the engine.
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select ESP.
X Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up
continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 221).
Observe the information on display messages
(Y page 192).

185

X

Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Assist.
Graphic.
X Press a to confirm.
The multifunction display shows the Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC distance display in the assistance graphic display.
The assistance graphic displays the status of
and information from the following driving
systems or driving safety systems:
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 151)
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 62)
RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 171)
RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 174)
X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
assessment.

X

Deactivating/activating ESP®
Observe the important safety notes on ESP®
(Y page 64).

G WARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Deactivating/activating ESP® in MercedesAMG vehicles (Y page 66).
For further information about ESP®, see
(Y page 64).

Activating/deactivating Active Brake
Assist
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Brake Assist.
X Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.
When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display.
Further information on Active Brake Assist
(Y page 62).
X

Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Attention Assist.
X Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X Press a to confirm.

X

Z

On-board computer and displays

X

Menus and submenus

186

Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
Standard or Sensitive.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphics display.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 171).

On-board computer and displays

X

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Blind Spot Assist.
X Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.
For further information about Blind Spot Assist,
see (Y page 172).
X

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Lane Keeping Assist.
X Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X Press a again to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
Standard or Adaptive.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the
multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic.
For further information about Lane Keeping
Assist, see (Y page 174).
X

RCalling

up display messages in message
memory (Y page 191)
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) (Y page 294)
RChecking the tire pressure electronically
(USA only) (Y page 294)
RCalling up the service due date
(Y page 261)

Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Sett. menu:
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
RChanging the light settings
RChanging the vehicle settings
RChanging the convenience settings
RRestoring the factory settings

Instrument cluster
Selecting the distance unit
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function.
You will see the selected setting: km or miles.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for distance
applies to:
RDigital

Service menu
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Serv. menu:

speedometer in the Trip menu
and the trip odometer
RTrip computer
RCurrent fuel consumption and approximate
range
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu
RCruise control
ROdometer

Menus and submenus
RASSYST

Pilot DISTRONIC
PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometer
on/off
If the additional speedometer is switched on,
the speed is shown in the status bar in the multifunction display instead of the outside temperature.
The speed display is inverse to the speedometer.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer
[mph] function.
You will see the selected setting: On or Off.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

Selecting permanent display
The Permanent Display: function allows you
to choose whether the multifunction display
always shows the outside temperature or the
speed.
The speed display is inverse to the speedometer.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instr. Cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display: function.
The current setting, Outside Temperature
or Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer
[mph], appears.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

Lights
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
off
This function is not available in Canada.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light submenu.

Press a to confirm.
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Daytime Running Lights function.
If the Daytime Running Lights function has
been switched on, the multifunction display
shows the cone of light and the W symbol
in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

X
X

Further information on daytime running lamps
(Y page 100).

Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Automatic Door Lock function.
If the Automatic Door Lock function is
switched on, the multifunction display shows
the doors in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X

If you activate the Automatic Door Lock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a
speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
For further information on the automatic locking
feature, see (Y page 77).

Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an
acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
the multifunction display shows the &
symbol in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

Z

On-board computer and displays

RDistance

187

Menus and submenus

188

On-board computer and displays

Comfort
Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking feature on/off
This function is only available in Canada.
This function is only available when the vehicle is
equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding
function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when
the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle
and then open the driver's or front-passenger
door, the exterior mirrors fold out again.
If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors using the button on the door
(Y page 97), they will not fold out automatically.
The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out
using the button on the door.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. Mirror Folding function.
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is
switched on, the multifunction display shows
the exterior mirror in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

Restoring the factory settings
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Factory Setting submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings? function
appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to select No or
Yes.
X Press the a button to confirm the selection.
If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
X

For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lights function in the Light submenu is only
reset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Warm-up

:
;
=
?
A
B
X

Digital speedometer
Gear indicator
Upshift indicator
Engine oil temperature
Coolant temperature
Transmission fluid temperature

Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP =
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
program.
Engine and transmission oil temperature:
when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temperature ? and B are displayed in white in the
multifunction display.
If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ? or B in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.

SETUP

:
;
=
?

Drive system Comfort/Sport/Sport +
Chassis Comfort/Sport/Sport +
Transmission D/M
ESP® On/Off or SPORT handling mode
Sport

Menus and submenus

RACE TIMER
Displaying and starting RACE TIMER

Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. Time.
X Press a to confirm.
The intermediate time appears for five seconds.
X

Starting a new lap

: RACE TIMER
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
X

Press a to confirm New Lap.

i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen
laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with
Finish Lap.

: Lap
; RACE TIMER

The RACE TIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
You can start the RACE TIMER when the engine
is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACE TIMER appears.
X To start: press the a button to start the
RACE TIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

Stopping the RACE TIMER

X
X

Press the % button on the steering wheel.
Confirm Yes with a.

The RACE TIMER interrupts timing if you stop the
vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in
the ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey to
position 3 and then press a Start to confirm, timing is continued.

Resetting the current lap
Stop the RACE TIMER.
Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap.
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
X
X

Z

On-board computer and displays

SETUP displays the following information and
functions:
Rthe digital speedometer
Rthe gear indicator
Rthe drive system setting
Rthe suspension mode
Rthe transmission position
Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.

189

190

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Deleting all laps

? Distance covered
A Maximum speed

This function is shown if you have stored at least
one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation appears.
If you switch off the engine, the RACE TIMER is
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not
have to be reset.
X Reset the current lap.
X Press a to confirm Reset.
Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multifunction display.
X Press the : button to select Yes and press
the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.

Lap statistics

Lap
Lap time
Average lap speed
Lap length
Top speed during lap

Overall statistics

:
;
=
?
A

: RACETIMER overall evaluation
; Total time driven
= Average speed

This function is only available if you have stored
at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press 9 repeatedly until a lap evaluation
appears.
Each lap appears in a separate submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation.

Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.

When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 157)
RParking (Y page 141)

Hiding display messages
Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display
messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
X

Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
X

Z

191

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

192

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Safety systems
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!÷

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist), ESP® (Electronic
Stability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
In addition, the !, ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient

Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road, making
slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷

Inoperative See
Operator's Manual

ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
The !, ÷, å and $ (USA only) or J (Canada only)
warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
unavailable.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
X

÷

Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due
to a malfunction.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z

193

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

194

Display messages
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

T!
÷

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD
function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
A warning tone sounds.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps may light up in
the instrument cluster.

Inoperative See
Operator's Manual

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock
if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Turn On the Igni‐
tion to Release the
Parking Brake

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition
was switched off.
X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.

F (USA
only) ! (Canada

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the
electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 143).
You
are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
only)
X
Release
the electric parking brake manually.
Please Release Park‐
ing Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 83).

F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Parking Brake See
Operator's Manual

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
Switch the ignition off.
Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
X Shift the transmission to position B.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

X

X

Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
X

or
X

Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
Release the electric parking brake manually.
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 142).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
X

Do not drive on.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
X

Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
Release the electric parking brake manually.

To apply:
X
X

Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash:
Do not drive on.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 309).
X Shift the transmission to position B.
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X

X

Z

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

195

196

Display messages
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:
X
X

Shift the transmission to position B.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:
X

Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 142).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply
the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to position B, as the electric parking
brake is not applied automatically.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F (USA
only) ! (Canada

only)
Parking Brake Inop‐
erative

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage.
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:
X
X

Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:
X

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to position B.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
Check Brake Fluid
Level

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
A warning tone sounds. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only)
warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.

G WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Brake Assist
Functions Currently
Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manual

Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Restart the engine.

Check Brake Pad Wear

Inoperative

Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. SituationActive Brake
Assist: System Inop‐ dependent braking assistance may also have failed.
erative
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

197

On-board computer and displays

198

Display messages
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Radar Sensors Dirty
See Operator's Man‐
ual

The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
Possible causes are:
RDirt on sensors
RHeavy rain or snow
RWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
RActive Brake Assist
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC
A warning tone also sounds.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message disappears.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Switch off the engine.
X Clean all sensors (Y page 265).
X Restart the engine.
The display message disappears.

6

The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also
lights up in the instrument cluster.

SRS Malfunction Ser‐
vice Required

G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 40).

6

Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service
Required or Front
Right Malfunction
Service Required

The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6

The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

Rear Left Malfunc‐
tion Service
Required or Rear
Right Malfunction
Service Required

6

Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required or
Right Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required

G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING
The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z

199

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

200

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated during the journey, although:
bag Disabled See
Operator's Manual
Ran adult
or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may
not be triggered in the event of an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has deactivated the frontpassenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag
(Y page 48)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 48).

Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled
during the journey, even though:
bag Enabled See
Operator's Manual
Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.

G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag may
be triggered unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS has deactivated the front-passenger front air bag and frontpassenger knee bag (Y page 48)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
Z

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

201

202

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 48).

Lights
i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:

The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp
have failed.

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Check Left Corner‐
ing Light or Check
Right Cornering
Light

Check Left Low Beam
or Check Right Low
Beam

Check Rear Left
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right
Turn Signal

Check Front Left
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right
Turn Signal

Check Left Mirror
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal

Check Center Brake
Lamp

Display messages
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b

Check Left Tail and
Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail
and Brake Lamps

b

On-board computer and displays

Check Left Brake
Lamp or Check Right
Brake Lamp

X

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left High Beam
(Y page 104).
or Check Right
or
High Beam
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b

License Plate Lamp

b

Rear Fog Lamp

b

Check Front Left
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right
Parking Lamp

b

Backup Light

b

Check Left Tail
Lamp or Check Right
Tail Lamp

203

X

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The rear fog lamp is faulty.
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The backup lamp is defective.
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X

Z

On-board computer and displays

204

Display messages
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b

The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp

Check Rear
Sidemarker
Check Rear
Sidemarker

Left
Lamp or
Right
Lamp

b

The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b

The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b

The light sensor is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning
tone also sounds.
X Turn the light switch to the à position.

Check Left Daytime
Running Light or
Check Right Daytime
Running Light

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative

Switch Off Lights

b

Switch On Headlamps

You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.
Turn the light switch to the L or à position.

X

Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

205

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+

The coolant level is too low.

Check Coolant Level
See Operator's Man‐
ual

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
X

cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 260).

If you have to add coolant frequently:
X

?

?

Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn
Engine Off

Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling
system checked.

The fan motor is malfunctioning.
At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest
qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

X

The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.
If the temperature increases again:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Z

On-board computer and displays

Engine

On-board computer and displays

206

Display messages
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#

The battery is not being charged.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes are:
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics

See Operator's Man‐
ual

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

X

#

The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is
too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Observe the instructions in the display message # See Oper‐
ator's Manual.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

4

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.

Stop Vehicle See
Operator's Manual

Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-

erwise be damaged.
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 258).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 259).

X

If the engine oil needs topping up more often:
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com.
X

æ

Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
Refuel at the nearest gas station.

X

Display messages

ç
æ

Gas Cap Loose

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

X

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

X

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X

Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

À

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or
a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
sounds.
X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.

Attention Assist:
Take a Break!

À

Attention Assist
Inoperative

ë
Off

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 157).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly
depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 157).

Z

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

207

On-board computer and displays

208

Display messages
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period
RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Assist
Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X

Blind Spot Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RThe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Pilot Can‐
celed

The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.

Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while
steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.
X Use Parking Pilot again later (Y page 164).
Parking Pilot Inop‐
erative

You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneuvers.
Parking Pilot will become available again after approximately ten
minutes (Y page 164).
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Switch off and restart the engine.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking Pilot Fin‐
ished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.

Distance Pilot Off

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated (Y page 155).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

Distance Pilot Now
Available

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 152).

Distance Pilot Cur‐
rently Unavailable
See Operator's Man‐
ual

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Restart the engine.
Z

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

209

210

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Distance Pilot Inop‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Situation-dependent
braking assistance may also have failed.
erative
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Distance Pilot Sus‐
pended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Distance Pilot
- - - mph

A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met.
X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
(Y page 152).

Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning.
erative
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control
- - - mph

RA

condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example.
RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
or
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 150).
or
X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 185).

Display messages

211

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Tire Pressure
Soon

Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped

G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey

may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 271).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 294).
Rthey

Check Tire Pressure
Then Restart Run
Flat Indicator

Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
and has not been restarted since.
X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 294).

Run Flat Indicator
Inoperative

Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Please Correct Tire
Pressure

USA only:
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 294).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 297).

Z

On-board computer and displays

Tires

Display messages
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Tires

USA only:
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
wheel position appears in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.

On-board computer and displays

212

G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey

may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 271).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 294).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Rthey

Warning Tire Mal‐
function

USA only:
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
position appears in the multifunction display.

G WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
Ra

flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle
could lose control of the vehicle
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 271).
Ryou

Tire Press. Monitor
Currently Unavaila‐
ble

USA only:
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure
monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

TirePress. Sen‐
sor(s) Missing

USA only:
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several tires.
The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the multifunction
display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors

USA only:
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The
tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for
a few minutes.

Tire Press. Monitor
Inoperative

USA only:
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Depress Brake to
Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N,
Depress Brake and
Start Engine

You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D without starting the engine.
X Start the engine.
X Depress the brake pedal.

i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the
desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the
parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the brake pedal,
the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock
remains engaged.

i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) you can

only shift out of position P into another transmission position when
the engine is running.

Apply Brake to
Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R, N or D
without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.

Z

213

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

214

Display messages
Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Transmission Not in
P Risk of Vehicle
Rolling Away

The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
position R, N or D.
A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Close the driver's door completely.
Service Required Do
Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position D is selected:
X

Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X
X

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

The vehicle is moving.
Only Shift to 'P'
when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
tionary
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
To Engage Trans‐
miss. Position R
First Depress the
Brake

You have attempted to shift from position D or N to transmission
position R.
X Shift the transmission to position R while depressing the brake
pedal.

Reversing Not Possi‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back up.
ble Service Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐
function

X

Transmission Mal‐
function Stop

X

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Stop Vehicle Shift
to P Leave Engine
Running

The automatic transmission has overheated.
X Drive on carefully.
The automatic transmission is available again when the display
message goes out.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message has disappeared.

Auxiliary Battery
Malfunction

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being
charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off
the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Trans. Oil Overhea‐
ted Drive on with
Care

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated.
Manual drive program M and the temporarily active manual drive program are no longer available. The engine power output is reduced.
X Allow the vehicle to cool down.

4matic Currently
Unavailable

4matic Inoperative

N
M

4MATIC has overheated. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels.
Drive on.
The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly.
When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available again and
the vehicle is driven by all four wheels.

X

4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front
wheels.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The trunk lid is open.
Close the trunk lid.

X

The hood is open.
A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Close the hood.

Z

215

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

216

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

C
Ð

Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐
tor's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
Close all the doors.

X

The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:
X
X

Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If you are unable to steer safely:
X
X

Do not drive on.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service

Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver
range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in the multifunction display.

¥

Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
X Add washer fluid (Y page 260).

Wiper Malfunction‐
ing

X

Hazard Warning
Flashers Malfunc‐
tioning

The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The hazard warning lamps are faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey
Display messages

Â

Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle

Â

Take Your Key from
Ignition

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Use the correct SmartKey.

X

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
A warning tone sounds
X Remove the SmartKey.

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Â

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Â

The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Change the battery (Y page 73).

Â

The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is
only a reminder.
You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. A warning tone sounds.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Â

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Locate the SmartKey.

Obtain a New Key

Replace Key Battery

Don't Forget Your
Key

Key Not Detected
(red display message)

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the
SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.

Â

Key Not Detected
(white display message)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.
X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X

Â

Remove 'Start' But‐
ton and Insert Key

Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

The SmartKey is continually undetected.
The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is
faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z

217

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

218

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.
These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting
the engine or whilst driving.

Safety
Seat belts
Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü

N After engine start, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).

ü

N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
The warning tone ceases.

ü

N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.

ü

N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

219

Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$J

N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J

N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Z

On-board computer and displays

Safety systems

On-board computer and displays

220

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore,
BAS (Brake Assist), Active Brake Assist, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the
HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also deactivated.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
!

N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, EBD
(electronic brake force distribution), the HOLD function and hill start assist, for
example, are also deactivated.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone
also sounds.
EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, the HOLD
function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!
֌
$J

N $(USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow
ABS, ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, Active Brake Assist, EBD, the
HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z

221

On-board computer and displays

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

222

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷

N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 66) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 64).

å

N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a
wheel starts to spin.

G WARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 66) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 64).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:
X Drive on carefully.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.
M

N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP®" section (Y page 66).

Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

֌

N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not
available due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
֌

N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z

223

On-board computer and displays

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

224

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!F

N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or lights up and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake lights up.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6

N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.

G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 40).

Engine
Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

;

N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal
requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal
regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

æ

N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

æ

N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

?

N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z

225

On-board computer and displays

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

226

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?

N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 260).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.

?

N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 260).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified
specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.

X

Driving systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

·

N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too
high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist
(Y page 62).

Z

On-board computer and displays

Warning/
indicator
lamp

227

228

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Tires
Warning/
indicator
lamp

N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h

N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey

may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase

Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-

tion.
driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 271).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 294).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Rthe

h

N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)
flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

General notes
The multimedia system section in this Operator's Manual describes the basic principles for
operation. More information can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual.

Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking the following into
account, for example:
Rtraffic

lights
and yield signs
Rparking or stopping restrictions
Rroad narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
The multimedia system may give incorrect navigation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example:
Ra diverted route
Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way
street has been changed
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Rstop

Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that is deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). However, it is recommended to install it at a distance
of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
radiation source and a person's body (not
including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
legs).

G WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.

Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
You will notice this, for example, because either
you will not be able to select certain menu items
or a message will appear to this effect.

Z

229

Multimedia system

Function restrictions

Operating system

230

Operating system
Overview
General notes

Multimedia system

! Do not use the space in front of the display
for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in
impairments to the display, which could be
irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off
completely.

Cleaning instructions
! Do not touch the display. The display has a

very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display.

Switching the multimedia system
on/off
X

Press the q control knob.

Adjusting the volume
Turn the q control knob.
The volume is adjusted:
Rfor the currently selected media source
Rduring traffic or navigation announcements
Rin hands-free mode during an active call
X

Switching the sound on or off
X

Press the 8 button on the control panel.
If the audio output is switched off, the status
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch

the media source or set the volume, the sound
is automatically switched on.
i Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.

Functions
The multimedia system has the following functions:
RRadio mode
RMedia mode with media search
RSound systems
RNavigation system
COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Audio 20: navigation via SD card
RCommunication functions
RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
RVehicle functions with system settings
RFavorites functions

Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
Rselect menu items on the display
Renter characters
Rselect a destination on the map
Rsave entries
The controller can be:
Rturned 3
Rslid left or right 1
Rslid forwards or back 4
Rslid diagonally 2
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back button
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
call up the main menu of the current operating
mode.
X To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
X To call up the main menu: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the main
menu of the current operating mode.

Operating system

You can assign predefined functions using the
g favorites button and call them up by pressing the button (Y page 231).

Favorites
Calling up and exiting favorites
To call up: press the g button on the controller.
X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.
The favorites are displayed.
X To exit: press the g button again.
X

Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
Press the g button.
COMAND: slide 6 the controller.
X Audio 20: slide 5 or 6 the controller.
The menu bar is displayed.
X Select Reassign.
The categories are displayed.
X Select a category.
The favorites are displayed.
X Select a favorite.
X COMAND: to add the favorite to the desired
position, turn and press the controller.
X Audio 20: to add the favorite to the desired
position, turn, slide 5 or 6 and press the
controller.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
X

X

Adding your own favorites
You can add climate control as a favorite, for
example.
X Select VehicleQClimate Control.
X Press and hold the g button until the
favorites are displayed.
X Add a favorite to the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.

Navigation mode
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the navigation system.

General notes
Among other things, correct functioning of the
navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, there may be interference or there
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions
are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD
card box contains a quick guide.
The following descriptions apply to navigation
with COMAND. Further information can be
found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route options
Multimedia system:
Select NaviQNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X Slide 6 the controller.
X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.
Notes for route types:
X

REco

Route
Traffic Route

RDynamic

Z

Multimedia system

Favorites button

231

Operating system

Multimedia system

232

Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account (not available in
all countries).
RDynamic TRF. Route After Request
You can decide whether or not current traffic
reports should be included in the route calculation (not available in all countries).
RCalculate Alternative Routes
Different routes are being calculated. In order
to do so, instead of Start, select the menu
item Continue.
X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Options.
X Select a route option.
Notes for route options:

Select the location.
If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
different ZIP codes available for the location,
the corresponding digits are displayed with an
X.
X Enter the street and house number.
The address is in the menu.
Further options for destination entry:
X

Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:
(only available in the USA)
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access
conditions for carpool lanes.
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool
lanes option is activated.

for a keyword
The keyword search finds destinations using
fragments of words.
Rselect the last destination
Rselect a contact
Rselect a POI
You can search for a POI by location, name or
telephone number.
Rselect destination on the map
Renter intermediate destination
You can map the route to the destination
yourself with up to four intermediate destinations.
Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Apps
Rselect geo-coordinates

Entering an address

Calculating the route

Multimedia system:

Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
is in the menu.
X Select Start or Continue.
The route is calculated with the selected route
type and the selected route options.
If route guidance has already been activated,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or
Set as Intermediate Destination.
Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels
the current route guidance and starts route
calculation to the new destination.
Set as Intermediate Destination adds
the new destination in addition to the existing
destination and opens the intermediate destinations list.

RUse

Select NaviQNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X Slide 6 the controller.
X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows:
Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number
Rstate/province, city or ZIP code
Rcity or ZIP code, center
Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection
X Select City.
The city in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top.
Below this, you will see locations for which
route guidance has already been carried out.
X Enter the city.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X To switch to the list: slide the 5 controller.
X

Rsearch

Connecting a mobile phone
(COMAND)
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you
require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile
1.0 or above.
Multimedia system:
Select VehicleQSystem Set‐
tingsQActivate Bluetooth.
X Activate Bluetooth® O.
X

Mobile phone:
X

Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you
connect:
RPhone book
RCall lists
RText messages and e-mail

i Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

i In the USA, you can get in touch with the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to
search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the

procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further
information on using a mobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
multimedia system at any one time.
Searching for a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
X Select Tel/®QConn.
DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart
Search.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
Symbols in the device list
Symbol

Explanation

Ï

New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.

Ñ

Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected.

#

Mobile phone is authorized and
connected.

Connecting a mobile phone
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
X Select mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
system.
X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
X If the codes are different: select No on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.

Z

233

Multimedia system

Operating system

Operating system

234

Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):

Multimedia system

Bluetooth®

Select the
name of the mobile
phone.
The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey.
X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.
X Press ¬ to confirm.
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

X

Connecting a mobile phone (Audio 20)
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you
require at least one Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phone depending on use of one-telephone
mode or two-telephone mode. The mobile
phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or
above.
In two-telephone mode you can use all the
functions of the multimedia system with the
main telephone. With the additional telephone, you can receive incoming calls.
Multimedia system:
Select VehicleQSystem Set‐
tingsQActivate Bluetooth.
X Activate Bluetooth® O.
X

Mobile phone:
X

Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information is transmitted after you connect
the main telephone:
RPhone book
RCall lists
RText messages and e-mail

i Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

i In the USA, you can get in touch with the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to
search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the
procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further
information on using a mobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
Searching for a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
X Select Tel/®QConn. DeviceQCon‐
nect New Device.
X Select Connect via vehicle.
X Select mobile phone.
Connecting a mobile phone
X
X

One-telephone mode: select Main Phone.
Two telephone mode: select Additional
Phone (Incoming Calls Only) when a
mobile phone is already connected.

Operating system

Symbols in the device manager
The symbols are shown in color depending on
their use.
Symbol

Explanation
Mobile phone connected to the
multimedia system
Main telephone with full range of
functions
Additional telephone for incoming
calls in two telephone mode

Media mode

on. Further information on media mode (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
The following external media sources can be
used:
RApple®

devices (e.g. iPhone®)
USB stick, MP3 player)

RUSB devices (e.g.
(Y page 236)

RCD

RDVD

(COMAND)
cards
Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®
RSD

i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD
changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Selecting using the device list
Multimedia system:
Select MediaQDevices.
The available media sources will be shown.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X Select the media source.
Playable files are played.

X

Inserting/removing an SD card
Important safety notes

G WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

! If you are no longer using the SD card, you

should remove it and store it outside the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card.

Inserting an SD card
The SD card slot is located on the control panel.
X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the contacts must face down.

General notes

Removing an SD card

If you wish to play external media sources, the
appropriate media mode must already be turned

X

Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
X Remove the SD card.
Z

Multimedia system

Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
X If the codes are different: select No on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.
or
X Authorization by entering a passkey
(passcode): enter any one- to sixteen-digit
number sequence which you have chosen
yourself into the passkey input menu.
X Press ¬ to confirm.
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
X

235

Operating system

236

Multimedia system

Connecting USB devices

Connect the USB device to the USB port.
There are two USB ports in the stowage space
under the armrest.
X Select the media source (Y page 235).
X

Loading guidelines
G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.

G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touching them.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle
are dependent on the distribution of the load
within the vehicle.
Observe the following notes when loading and
transporting a load:
RNever

exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight
rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
The values are specified on the vehicle iden-

tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's
door.
RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the trunk as possible.
RThe load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
RAlways place the load against the rear or front
seat backrests. Make sure that the seat
backrests are securely locked into place.
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
nets to transport loads and luggage.
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the
load.
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
protection.

Stowage areas
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
retain all objects they contain. There is a risk
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces before
starting a journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 237).
Z

237

Stowage and features

Stowage areas

Stowage areas

238

Stowage compartments in the front

Stowage and features

Glove box

To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until
it engages.
There is a pen holder at the top of the glove box
flap.
X

Eyeglasses compartment

X

To open: press marking :.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is
always closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment in the front center
console

X

To open: press the marking on cover :.

i Depending on the vehicle equipment, there
may be an ashtray in the center console
instead of a storage compartment.

Stowage compartment in front of the armrest (vehicles with automatic transmission)

X

To open: press the marking on cover :.

i You can remove the non-slip mat and the

insert for cleaning. When removing the insert
you will have to overcome some slight resistance.

Stowage areas
Stowage compartment under the armrest

239

Parcel nets
Stowage nets are located:
Rin the front-passenger footwell
Ron the back of the driver's and the frontpassenger seat
Ron the left and right-hand side in the trunk
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 237)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 237).

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the armrest can be moved backwards or forwards in a
longitudinal direction.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following may be in the stowage compartment: a
multimedia connector unit with an SD card slot
and 2 USB ports, e.g. for use with an iPod®,
iPhone® or MP3 player; see the separate operating instructions.

Stowage space in the rear

Through-loading facility in the rear

X
X

Stowage compartment in the rear center
console

Stowage and features

To open: on vehicles with movable armrests,
make sure that the armrest is in the rearmost
position.
X Press button : and fold the armrest up.
X

To open: fold down seat armrest :.
Pull the center head restraint on the rear
bench seat into the uppermost position
(Y page 93).

Slide locking mechanism = in the direction
of the arrow.
X Swing flap ; fully to the side.
Flap ; is held open by a magnet.
X

X

To open: pull down the top of stowage compartment : by the edge of the handle.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,

there may be an open stowage space above
the stowage compartment.

To close: swing flap ; in the trunk back until
it engages.
X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary.
X

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 237).
Z

240

Stowage areas
Cargo compartment enlargement

Stowage and features

Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be
restrained by the seat backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
! Before folding the backrest in the rear com-

partment forwards, make sure that the rear
compartment armrest and the cupholder are
folded in. They may otherwise be damaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 237).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests
can be folded forwards separately to increase
the trunk capacity.

Fully insert the backrest head restraints if
necessary (Y page 93).
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ;
of the seat backrest forward.
Corresponding seat backrest : is released.
X Fold backrest : forward.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
X

X

Insert the seat belt into seat-belt holder :.

Folding the rear seat backrest back

! Make sure that the seat belt does not

become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged.

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
and back
Folding the rear seat backrests forward

Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 93).
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
X

Stowage areas

241

Securing loads

X

Hook handle : into rain trough ;.

To enlarge the trunk you can remove the trunk
floor.
X To remove: lift the trunk floor almost to rain
trough ; and pull it out.

: Cargo tie-down rings

Stowage well under the trunk floor

To insert: place the trunk floor at the bottom
in the center.
X Hold sides of trunk floor = and press in the
direction of the arrow until it engages in
hooks ?.
X

Roof carrier
Important safety notes

Under the trunk floor you can find a bracket for
TIREFIT and the vehicle tool kit, etc.
X To open: pull handle : up.

G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
load, the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.
Z

Stowage and features

Observe the following notes on securing loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 237).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip
protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or
corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.

Features

242

Stowage and features

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only

use roof carriers that have been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof rack in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage
even when it is in motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure
that when the roof carrier is installed you can:
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel fully
Ropen the trunk lid fully
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 320).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
may become detached from the vehicle. You
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.

Attaching the roof carrier

Open and fold the covers : upwards carefully in the direction of the arrow.
X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage
points under covers :.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
X

Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst

traveling, the container may be flung around
and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may
be distracted from the traffic conditions and
you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident and injury.
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
stationary. Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
retain all objects they contain. There is a risk
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces before
starting a journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk.

! Only use the cup holders for containers of

the right size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 237).
The stowage compartments in the doors provide
space for bottles:
Rfront: capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l)
Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l)

Features
Cup holder in the front center console

243

of the upper section of cup holder : faces
forwards.
X Press the cup holder downwards until it
engages on the right and left-hand sides.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
! Do not sit on or support your body weight on

the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding the rear
: Cup holder

The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath
can be removed for cleaning. Clean them with
clean, lukewarm water only.
X To remove: carefully pull in upper sections of
cup holder : on the driver's and frontpassenger sides until they release.
X Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can be
removed.

Fold down the rear seat armrest.
To open: press the front of cup holder :
or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until
it engages.
X

X

Sun visors
Overview
G WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.

X

To install: insert cup holder into lateral
curved sections ; in the stowage compartment. Insert the cup holder so that the wedge

Z

Stowage and features

seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder
could be damaged.

Features

244

Vehicles with a stowage compartment
cover: press the lower section of cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; and
out.
X To re-install the insert: press insert = into
the holder until it engages.
X

i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can use

Stowage and features

the resulting compartment for stowage.

:
;
=
?
A

Mirror light
Bracket
Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
Vanity mirror
Mirror cover

Rear compartment ashtray

Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has
been folded up.

Glare from the side
Fold down the sun visor.
X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
X

Ashtray

To open: pull cover = out by its top edge.
To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in the
direction of arrow ? until it audibly releases.
X Lift insert ; up and out.
X To install the insert: install insert ; from
above into the holder and press down until it
engages.
X

X

Front ashtray
! The stowage space under the ashtray is not
heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in
the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is
properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage
space could be damaged.

Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe

hot cigarette lighter falls
child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.

Ra

Features
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter
when road and traffic conditions permit.

245

Determining the location of the vehicle on a map
is only possible if:
RGPS reception is available.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the
Customer Assistance Center

Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Vehicles with a stowage compartment
cover: press the lower section of cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
X

To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
follows:
X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Use the multimedia system's volume control.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
RAutomatic and manual emergency call
RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call
You can find information and a description of all
available features under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test
mbrace
General notes
The mbrace system is only available in the USA.
You must have a license agreement to activate
the mbrace service. Make sure that your system
is activated and operational. To log in, press the
ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps
mentioned are not carried out, the system may
not be activated.
If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
1-866-990-9007
Shortly after successfully registering with the
mbrace service, a user ID and password will be
sent to you by mail. You can use this password
to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
Rit has been activated and is operational
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
available for transmitting data to the Customer Center
Ra service subscription is available

After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been detected
if one of the following occurs:
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not
come on during the system self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistance button does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does not light up during self-diagnosis
of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after
the system self-diagnosis:
- SOS button
- F Roadside Assistance call button
- ï MB Info call button
RThe Inoperative or the Service Not
Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
the system may not operate as expected. In the
event of an emergency, help will have to be
summoned by other means.
Z

Stowage and features

The mbrace system

246

Features
Have the system checked at the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the
following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
1-866-990-9007

Emergency call
Important safety notes

G WARNING

Stowage and features

It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
emergency if:
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-

cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
vehicle is on a dangerous section of
road
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the
vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
Rthe

All important information on the emergency is
transmitted, for example:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined
by the GPS system)
Rvehicle identification number
Rinformation on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously.
The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.

Making an emergency call

General notes
Observe the notes on system activation
(Y page 245).
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated manually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The Connecting Call message
appears in the multifunction display.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the Call
Connected message appears in the multifunction display.

To initiate an emergency call manually:
press cover : briefly to open.
X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one
second ;.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
until the emergency call is concluded.
X Wait for a voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center.
X

X

or

To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.

Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.
X After the emergency call, close cover :.
X

If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
mbrace will not be able to make the emergency
call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after
pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if
mbrace has successfully made the emergency
call. In this case, always summon assistance by
other means.

Breakdown assistance button

X

To make a call: press Roadside assistance
call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside assistanc button : flashes while the call is active. The
Connecting Call message appears on the
multifunction display. The audio output is
muted.

If a connection can be established, the Call
Connected message appears in the multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle
Rvehicle identification number
The display of the multimedia system indicates
that a call is active. During the call, you can
change to the navigation menu by pressing the
NAVI button on the multimedia system, for
example.
Voice output is not available in this case.

A voice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem
(Y page 250).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle
to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz
Service Center.
You may be charged for services such as repair
work and/or towing.
You can find more information in the separate
mbrace manual.
The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside assistance call, if:
Rthe F indicator lamp for the Roadside
assistance call button is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears on the multifunction display.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.

MB Info call button

X

To make a call: press MB Info call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Z

247

Stowage and features

Features

248

Features

Stowage and features

The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
flashes while the connection is being made.
The Connecting Call message appears on
the multifunction display. The audio output is
muted.
If a connection can be established, the Call
Connected message appears in the multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle
Rvehicle identification number
The display of the multimedia system indicates
that a call is active. During the call, you can
change to the navigation menu by pressing the
NAVI button on the multimedia system, for
example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz.
You can find further information on the mbrace
system under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
The system has not been able to initiate an MB
Info call, if:
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï
is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears on the multifunction display.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.

Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call
can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency
call will take priority and override all other active
calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering
wheel
Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia
system to end the voice call
When a call is initiated, the audio system is
muted.
The mobile phone is no longer connected to the
multimedia system.
However, if you want to use your mobile phone,
do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in
a safe location.

Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations gives you access to a
database with over 15 million points of interest
(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the
destination, the address can be downloaded.
Alternatively, you can obtain the location of
Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations
in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with up
to four way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance to
the address entered.
X

SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
the controller and confirm with 7.
The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
If you select No the address can be stored in
the address book.

Features

Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package
and cannot be purchased separately.
You can use the Route Assistance function even
if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation
system.
Within the framework of this service, you receive
a professional and reliable form of navigation
support without having to leave your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You
will then be guided live through the current route
section.

Enter the e-mail address you specified when
setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field.
X Click "Send".
Information on specific commands such as
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the
website.

Calling up a transmitted destination
address

To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be
equipped with mbrace and a navigation system.
Additionally, an mbrace service subscription
must be completed.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A
destination address found on Google Maps™
can be transferred via mbrace directly to your
vehicle's navigation system.

Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
The transmitted destination address is loaded
into the vehicle's navigation system.
A display message appears, asking whether
navigation should be started.
X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
the controller and confirm with 7.
The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
If you select No the address can be stored in
the address book.
If you have sent more than one destination
address, each individual destination must be
confirmed separately.
Destination addresses are loaded in the same
order as the order in which they were sent.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with
mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:
If multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will be
sent to all the vehicles.

Specifying and sending the destination
address

Vehicle remote opening

Search and Send
General notes

Go to the website http://maps.google.com
and enter a destination address into the entry
field.
X To send the destination address to the email address of your mbrace account:
click on the corresponding button on the website.
Example:
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will
be sent to your vehicle.
X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
X

X

You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a
replacement SmartKey is not available.
The vehicle can be opened by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately opened
remotely within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
remotely.
The vehicle remote unlocking feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible.
X Contact the following service hotlines:
Z

Stowage and features

The destination download function is available
if:
Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation system.
Rthe relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible.

249

250

Features

Stowage and features

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,
Android™)
To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

Vehicle remote closing
The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used
when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and
you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked
within four days of the ignition being turned off.
After this time, remote closing may be delayed
by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle
can no longer be valet locked remotely.
The vehicle remote closing feature is available if
the relevant mobile phone network is available
and a data connection is possible.
X Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and you
switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked
Remotely message appears in the multifunction
display.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,
Android™)
To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery service
If your vehicle has been stolen:
X Notify the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
X This number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center then tries to locate the system. The
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
contacts you and the local law enforcement
agency if the vehicle is located.
However, only the law enforcement agency is
informed of the location of the vehicle.
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center is automatically
notified.

Vehicle Health Check
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
Assistance Center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the
Customer Assistance Center.
The customer service representative can use
the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example,
guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service
Center or a recovery vehicle is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an
MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.
The Roadside Assistance Connected message appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health
Check can be started, the Request for Vehi‐
cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐
cle diagnostics? message appears in the
display.
X Press the Yes button to confirm the message.
X When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please
Start Ignition message appears: turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
(Y page 122).
X If the Please follow the instructions
received by phone and move your vehi‐
cle to a safe position. message
appears: please follow the instructions

Features

When the check is complete, the Sending
vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐
nection may be interrupted during
data transfer) message appears. The vehicle
data can now be sent.
X Press the OK button to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance Center is terminated.
The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐
ring Data... message appears.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance Center.
Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a
later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or
phone.
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is
the transfer of service data to the Customer
Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display
shows a message to this effect together with
information about any special offers at your
workshop.
This information can also be called up under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
(Y page 29).
Information on Roadside Assistance
(Y page 26).

Downloading routes
Downloading routes allows you to transfer and
save predefined routes in the navigation system.
A route can be prepared and sent by either a
customer service representative or under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Each route can include up to four way points.
Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see the Do you want to
start route guidance? Destination
Received destination has been saved

in "Previous destinations". message on
the multimedia system display.
The route is saved.
X To start route guidance: select Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the display.
If you select No, the saved route can be called
up later in the navigation menu.
X Select Start.
Route guidance starts.
Downloaded and saved routes can be called up
again.

Speed alert
You can define the upper speed limit, which
must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,
a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance Center
then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive this
information beforehand. Possible options
include text message, e-mail or an automated
call.
The data you receive contains the following
information:
Rthe location where the speed limit was exceeded
Rthe time at which the speed limit was exceeded
Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the
vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be
informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries
of the selected areas. You can select the way in
which you receive this information beforehand.
Possible options include text message, e-mail or
an automated call.
The area can be determined as either a circle or
a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You
can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area.
These settings can be called up under "Owners
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and
inform the customer service representative that
you wish to activate geo fencing.
Z

Stowage and features

received by phone and move your vehicle to a
safe position.
The message in the display disappears.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐
cle Diagnostics Active message.
If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health
Check is canceled completely.

251

252

Features
Currently inactive areas can be activated by text
message.

Triggering the vehicle alarm
With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's
panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds
and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on
the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

Stowage and features

General notes
The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated
in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
to three different door and gate systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only on
garage doors that:
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not leave the
engine running while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
door opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service
Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge)
More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at
http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 27).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes
G WARNING
When you operate or program the garage door
with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage
door can become trapped or struck by the
garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
door.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.

Programming
Programming the buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 252).

Garage door remote control A is not included
with the integrated garage door opener.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 122).
X Select one of buttons ; to ? to control the
garage door drive.

To start program mode: press and hold one
of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage
door opener.
The garage door opener is now in program
mode. After a short time, indicator lamp :
lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as
button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time.
If the selected button has already been programed, indicator lamp : will only light up
yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
X Press and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code (Y page 253).
X Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
X

Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 252).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door
drive control panel. The programming button
may be located in different places depending on
the manufacturer. It is usually located on the
door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive
operating instructions, e.g. under "Program-

ming additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage
door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are
present within the sweep of the door or gate.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 122).
X Get out of the vehicle.
X Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate
the next step.
X Get into the vehicle.
X Press previously programed button ;, =
or ? on the integrated garage door opener
repeatedly and in quick succession until the
door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then complete.

Notes on programming the remote control
Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break"
(or interruption) of the transmission signals
after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,
these signals may not last long enough for the
integrated garage door opener. The signal is not
detected during programming. Comparable with
Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers
also feature a "break".
Proceed as follows:
Rif you live in Canada
Rif you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where you
live) as you follow the programming steps.
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the
integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up
yellow.
X Release the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two
seconds.
X Press button B again for two seconds.
X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote
control A until indicator lamp : lights up
green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished.
Z

253

Stowage and features

Features

Stowage and features

254

Features
When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code.
X Release button B of remote control A of the
garage door drive.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programming process for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programming
the integrated garage door opener on the rearview mirror, take note of the following instructions:
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by
garage door drive remote control A and
whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of
remote control A for the garage door drive.
The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which
operate in the frequency range of 280 to
433 MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door remote
control A. This increases the likelihood that
garage door remote control A will transmit a
strong and precise signal to the integrated
garage door opener.
RWhen programming, hold remote control A
at varying distances and angles from buttons ; to ? which you are programming. Try
various angles at a distance between 2and
8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but
at varying distances.
RIf another remote control A is available for
the same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming steps with this remote control
A. Before performing these steps, make sure
that new batteries have been installed in
garage door drive remote control A.
RNote that some remote controls only transmit
for a limited amount of time (the indicator
lamp on the remote control goes out). Press

button B on remote control A again before
transmission ends.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of the
garage door system remote control. Please also
read the operating instructions for the garage
door system.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 122).
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission is
halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.

Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling the
vehicle.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 122).
X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Features
Compass
Calling up the compass

255

Calibrating the compass
Notes
In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do
the following:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not in
the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage
transmission lines.
Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear window defroster.
Rclose all doors and the trunk lid.

: Rear-view mirror
; Compass display
= Opening

The compass displays in which compass direction the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE, E,
SE, S, SW, W or NW.
To receive a correct compass display reading,
the magnetic field zone must be set and the
compass calibrated.

Setting the compass
Set your location using the magnetic field
zone maps (Y page 255).
X Push a round pen into opening = for approximately three seconds.
The magnetic field zone currently selected
appears in compass display ;.
X To select the magnetic field zone: push a
round pen into opening = until the desired
magnetic field zone is selected.
If, after a few seconds, the display in compass
display ; changes direction, the magnetic
field zone has been selected.
X

Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding traffic.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Push a round pin into opening = for approximately six seconds, until symbol C is shown in
compass display ;.
X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h).
When the calibration has been successfully
completed, the current direction is shown in
compass display ;.

Magnetic field zone maps
North America

Z

Stowage and features

Calibrating
X

Features

256

Stowage and features

South America

Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.

X
X

Slide the seat back.
To install: place the floormat in the footwell.

Press safety catch knobs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
X

Engine compartment

Hood
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one is
within its range of movement.

G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.

G WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:

Rremove

jewelry and watches
items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts

Rkeep

G WARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch
components which are under voltage, you
could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
injury.
Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition
is switched on.

Opening the hood
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.

G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers are

not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood.

Rswitch

off the ignition
reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area

Rnever

Z

Maintenance and care

Engine compartment

257

Engine compartment

258

Closing the hood
Raise the hood slightly and, at the same time,
remove support strut ? from yellow retaining
clip =.
X Swing support strut ? down and press it into
bracket A until it engages.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Do not press the hood
closed. Open the hood again and close it with
a little more force.
X

Make sure that the windshield wipers are
switched off.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.

Maintenance and care

X

Engine oil
General notes

Reach into the gap between the hood and the
radiator trim and press hood catch lever ; to
the left.
X Raise the hood.
X

Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may
be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface
Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal
operating temperature
Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying
out the measurement

Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick

X
X

Pull support strut ? out of bracket A.
Lift up support strut ? and insert it into yellow retaining clip =.

G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.

Engine compartment

259

! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are

X

! Do not add too much oil. adding too much

engine oil can result in damage to the engine
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off.

Adding engine oil
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.

G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine.

H Environmental note

Example: engine oil cap
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
X Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
engine oil.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(Y page 258).
Further information on engine oil (Y page 317).

X

When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.

Z

Maintenance and care

Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube
to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX
mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil.

approved for vehicles with a service system. A
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have
been tested and approved in accordance with
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products is available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or damage
to the exhaust system:
RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the service
system
RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after
the replacement interval specified by the
service system has expired
RUse of engine oil additives

Engine compartment

260

Checking and adding other service
products
Checking coolant level
G WARNING
The cooling system is pressurized, particularly
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap,
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.
There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before you open the
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly
open the cap to relieve pressure.
! The coolant may only be checked and cor-

Maintenance and care

rected when the engine is cool (coolant temperature below 104 ‡ (40 †). Checking the
coolant when the coolant temperature is
above 104 ‡ (40 †) may result in damage to
the engine or to the engine cooling system.

If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 318).

X

Windshield washer system
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.

G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
104 ‡ (40 †).
X Turn the SmartKey to position g
(Y page 122) in the ignition lock .
X Slowly turn cap : counter-clockwise and to
relieve excess pressure.
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
X

To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
Add the premixed washer fluid.
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears
in the multifunction display prompting you to
add washer fluid (Y page 216).
Further information on windshield washer fluid/
antifreeze (Y page 319).
X

X

ASSYST PLUS

Service message
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
You can find information on the type of service
and service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display

does not show any information on the engine
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil
level (Y page 258).
The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.:
RService

A in .. days
RService A due
RService A overdue by .. days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the
next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, indicates the type of
service. A stands for a minor service and B for a
major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time during
which the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule:
X Note down the service due date displayed in
the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery.
or
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display.

Hiding a service message
X

Press the a or % button on the steering
wheel.

Displaying service messages
Switch on the ignition.
Press the = or ; button to select the
Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button.
The service due date appears in the multifunction display.

X
X

Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
interval display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

has been inadvertently reset, this setting can
be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described in
the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
lead to increased wear and damage to the
major assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the
service work has been carried out. You can also
obtain further information on maintenance
work, for example.

Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Under arduous operating conditions or
increased load on the vehicle, maintenance
work must be carried out more frequently, for
example:
Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate
stops
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods
Rin particularly dusty conditions, or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used
In these or similar operating conditions, have
the interior filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil
and oil filter, for example, changed more freZ

Maintenance and care

ASSYST PLUS

261

262

Care
quently. Under arduous operating conditions,
the tires must be checked more often. Further
information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center.

Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is
also available in other countries. You can obtain
further information from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

Maintenance and care

General notes
H Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible manner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of

the following:
Rdry, rough or hard cloths
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rsolvents
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films
with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.
You could otherwise scratch or damage the
surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of

time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
long period of time.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
Automatic car wash
G WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the

HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless

Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatic transmission

is in position N when washing your vehicle in
a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could be
damaged if the transmission is in another
position.

! Make sure that:
Rthe

side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed.
Rthe blower is switched off.
Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0.
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
caused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each country.

Care

Power washers
G WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced immediately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least

11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about the
correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
RTires
RDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
RElectrical components
RBattery
RConnectors
RLamps
RSeals
RTrim
RVentilation slots

Damaged seals or electrical components can
lead to leaks or failures.

! Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your

vehicle are covered with a decorative film.
Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)
between the parts of the vehicle covered with
the film and the nozzle of the high pressure
cleaner.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork
! Do not affix:
Rstickers
Rfilms

Rmagnetic

plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
care cannot always be completely repaired. In
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,
fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a
cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
case approximately every three to five months,
depending on the climate conditions and the
care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz
should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or on
the hood while the hood is hot.

Z

Maintenance and care

Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X Use a soft sponge to clean.
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water.
X Do not point the water jet directly towards the
air inlet.
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
frequently.
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
soon as possible when driving in winter.
X

263

Care

264
X

Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB TouchUp Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy

wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint to

become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect:
Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with
unsuitable materials
Rfrequent use of automatic car washes
Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

Maintenance and care

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing

products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the
purpose of paintwork care. These products
are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their
use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to
considerable surface damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spotted areas.
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax

treatment under any circumstances.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear
matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage
to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with
a clear matte finish.
The vehicle should ideally be washed by hand
using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of
water.
Use only insect remover and car shampoo from
the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care
products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
G WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced immediately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
long period of time.

Cleaning the windows
G WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.

! Only fold the windshield wipers away from

the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you
will damage the hood.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,

solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of the

windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead
to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components.
X Clean the inside and outside of the windows
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that
is recommended and approved by MercedesBenz.

Care
Cleaning wiper blades
G WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.

X

265

Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.

Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a power

washer, make sure that you keep a distance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
and the power washer nozzle. Information
about the correct distance is available from
the equipment manufacturer.

! Only fold the windshield wipers away from

the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you
will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade could be damaged.

Maintenance and care

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding

back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
windshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights
with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,
e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.

X

Clean sensors : of the driving systems with
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.

Z

Care

266

Make sure that the vehicle is at a standstill
and the SmartKey is in key position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the
multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions).
X To clean the rear view camera: use clear
water and a soft cloth to clean camera
lens :.

X

Maintenance and care

Cleaning the exhaust pipes
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touching them.
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with black exhaust

pipes: the black-chrome tailpipe finishers
should not be polished with a chrome polish.
They will otherwise lose their black sheen. For
optimal care, the faceplates should be rubbed
with a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash.
Commercially available engine and care oils
are suitable for this.
For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paintwork polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove
the excess polish residue after polishing.
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit
and corrosive environmental factors may cause
flash rust to form on the surface. You can
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by
cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and
after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
Ralcohol-based

thinner or gasoline
cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household cleaning
agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface when
cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display.
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it
is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD
display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber
cloth.
Rabrasive

Cleaning the plastic trim
G WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.

! Never attach the following to plastic surfaces:

Rstickers

Rfilms

Rperfume

oil container or similar
You could otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or

sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
the surfaces.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.

Care

X

Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents

such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.

The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can
lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use
a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning
the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are
unsure as to whether the trim pieces are
chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers
General notes

! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers

made out of real leather, artificial leather or
DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage
the cover.
Note that regular care is essential to ensure that
the appearance and comfort of the covers is
retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers

! To retain the natural appearance of the

leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
RClean genuine leather covers carefully with
a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with a dry cloth.
RMake sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise become
rough and cracked.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified
specialist workshop.
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
Rdifferences in the texture
Rmarks caused by growth and injury
Rslight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.

Seat covers of other materials

! Observe the following when cleaning:
Rclean

artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
depend on the type of dirt and how long it
has been there.
Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts
G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
Z

Maintenance and care

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever

267

Care

268

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †)
or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets
Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.

Maintenance and care

X

Where will I find...?
Where will I find...?

269

Information on reflective safety jackets

Reflective safety jacket

The reflective safety jackets are located in front
door stowage compartments :. Reflective
safety jackets can also be stored in the rear door
stowage compartments.
X To remove: pull out the safety jacket bag
containing the reflective safety jacket.
X Open the safety jacket bag and pull out the
reflective safety jacket.
X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll
it up and stow it in the safety jacket bag.
X Replace the safety jacket bag into stowage
compartment :.
i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from
its packaging material before sliding it into
the stowage compartment. The packaging
material may otherwise cause it to slip out or
make removing it difficult.
Observe the legal requirements in each country.

:
;
=
?
A
B
C

Maximum number of washes
Maximum wash temperature
Do not bleach
Do not iron
Do not use a laundry dryer
Do not dry-clean
This is a class 2 vest

RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require-

ments defined by the legal standard only:
- if the correct size is used and
- if the reflective safety jackets are correctly
fastened
RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety
jackets are clean and intact. The special properties may otherwise be compromised.
RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored
in their original packaging in a dry place away
from sources of heat and light.
RThe maximum number of washes specified is
not the only factor influencing the life span of
the reflective safety jackets. Their life span
also depends on use, care, storage, etc.
RThe reflective safety jackets should be disposed of and replaced with new ones:
- after 15 washes, and/or
- if the reflective strips have become
scratched, and/or
- if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
- if the fluorescence has faded e.g. due to the
effects of sunlight
RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an environmentally responsible manner. To do so,
contact your local waste disposal company.

Breakdown assistance

Removing/replacing the reflective
safety jacket

Where will I find...?

270

Warning triangle

First-aid kit

Removing/replacing the warning triangle

X
X

To remove: open the trunk lid.
X Press warning triangle holder : in the direction of the arrow and open. Lift retaining clip
= and remove warning triangle ;.
X To replace: place warning triangle ; back
into warning triangle holder :.
X Close warning triangle holder : and push up
to secure.

Breakdown assistance

X

Setting up the warning triangle

X
X

Fold feet = out to the side.
Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using upper
press-stud :.

Open the trunk lid.
Remove first-aid kit :.

Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit at
least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace missing items.

Vehicle tool kit
General notes
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is
located in the stowage well under the trunk
floor.
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tirechange tool kit is in the stowage well under the
trunk floor.
Apart from certain country-specific variations,
the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change
tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are
specific to the vehicle. For more information on
which tire changing tools are required and
approved to perform a wheel change on your
vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tools required for changing a wheel may
include, for example:
RJack
RWheel chock
RLug wrench
RAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Tire inflation compressor
; Tire sealant filler bottle
= Towing eye

Open the trunk lid.
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 241).
X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 272) or remove it.
Towing eye = is located under tire inflation
compressor :.

X

X

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit
Open the trunk lid.
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 241).
X Remove the tire-change tool kit.
The tire-change tool kit contains:
RJack
RLug wrench
ROne pair of gloves
RFolding wheel chock
X

X

Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) (Y page 271)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 270)
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.

winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on changing and mounting wheels
(Y page 307).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 141).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
X Switch off the engine.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
g. This is the same as "Key removed".
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone (Y page 83).
X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is
near the danger area while a wheel is being
changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting
in the wheel change should, for example,
stand behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic
conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
or more tires. The affected tire must not show
any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 302).
MOExtended tires may be used only in conjunction with an activated tire pressure loss warning

271

Breakdown assistance

Flat tire

272

Flat tire
system (Canada only) or tire pressure monitor
(USA only).
If a pressure loss warning message appears
in the multifunction display:
Robserve the instructions
sages (Y page 211).

in the display mes-

Rcheck

the tire for damage
driving on, observe the following notes
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully
laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon:
Rvehicle speed
Rroad condition
Routside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
warning appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
When replacing one or all tires, please observe
the following specifications for your vehicle's
tires:
Rsize
Rtype and
Rthe "MOExtended" marking
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be
used as a temporary measure. Make sure that
you use the proper size and type (summer or
winter tire).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.

Breakdown assistance

Rif

Important safety notes
G WARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-

ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
Ryou

hear banging noises.
vehicle starts to shake.
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.

Rthe

RESP®

is intervening constantly.
are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
workshop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
Rthere

TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
Only valid for USA: You can use TIREFIT to seal
punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly
those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at
outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger

than those mentioned above.
wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Rthe

G WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not

Flat tire
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:

Using the TIREFIT kit

RRinse

! Residue from the tire sealant may come out
of the filler hose after use. This could cause
stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

Do not remove any foreign objects which have
penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
X USA only: Remove the tire sealant bottle, the
accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire
inflation compressor from the stowage space
under the trunk floor (Y page 271).
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
X

H Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor

for longer than ten minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated
again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.

Remove filler hose B and connector = from
the bottom section of the tire inflation compressor housing ;.
X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the
mounting on yellow cap A of tire sealant filler
bottle : until the connector engages.
X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap
A of tire sealant bottle : into the mounting
of tire inflation compressor ;.
Yellow cap A and both hooks must engage.
X

Z

Breakdown assistance

off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water.
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.

273

Flat tire

274

Tire pressure not reached

Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.

X

Insert plug = into a 12 V socket in your vehicle.
Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 244).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Press on and off switch ? on the tire inflation
compressor to ON.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase.
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then
have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa
(2.0 bar/29 psi).
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (Y page 274).
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure not reached" (Y page 274).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if
possible.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have
them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry
cleaner as soon as possible.

Breakdown assistance

X

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
not been attained after ten minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X USA only: very slowly drive forwards or
reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).

G WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
G WARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
the specified maximum speed with a tire that
has been repaired using tire sealant.
USA only: The maximum permissible speed for
a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph
(80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker
must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the
driver's field of vision.

Flat tire

275

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
been attained after ten minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
USA only: Stow the tire sealant bottle and the
tire inflation compressor.
X Pull away immediately.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with the
tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
X

i USA only: In cases such as the one men-

tioned above, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X USA only: Correct the tire pressure if it is still
at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in
the fuel filler flap for values.
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
tire inflation compressor.

To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire
inflation compressor, press together the locking tabs on the yellow cap.
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
sealant bottle.
X

Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there.
X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose
replaced as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
X

Z

Breakdown assistance

G WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.

To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release button : next to pressure
gauge ;.
X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
sealed tire.
X

276

Battery (vehicle)
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes

Breakdown assistance

Special tools and expert knowledge are required
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and
installation. You should therefore have all work
involving the battery carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.

G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
example:
Rwhen

braking
the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Rin

For further information about ABS and ESP®,
see (Y page 61) and (Y page 64).

G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jump-starting.

Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
electrostatic charge can be caused, for example:
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials
Rif you rub the battery with a cloth

G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.
H Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with

Battery (vehicle)

! Have the battery checked regularly at a

qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist
workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving the bat-

tery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that:
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure
that the ignition is switched off. Check that
all the indicator lamps in the instrument
cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be
damaged.
Ryou first remove the negative terminal
clamp and then the positive terminal
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system
may be damaged.
Rin vehicles with automatic transmission,
the transmission is locked in position P
after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle
is secured against rolling away. You can
then no longer move the vehicle.
The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during
operation.
Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
especially gloves, apron and faceguard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
with clear water. Contact a physician
if necessary.
Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
occupants from suffering acid burns should the
battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.
In this case, have the battery disconnected at a
qualified specialist workshop. You can also
charge the battery with a charger recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
parked for a long period of time.
Only replace a battery with a battery that has
been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Z

Breakdown assistance

the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special
collection point for used batteries.

277

278

Jump-starting
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electrical consumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus
conserving battery power.
If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if
you reconnect the battery, you will have to:
Rset the clock using the multimedia system;
see the separate operating instructions
Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 97)

Charging the battery

Breakdown assistance

G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-start-

ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maximum
charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-

starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 278).
X Open the hood.
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure (Y page 278).
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in
the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is
very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the
vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of
a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly
at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only charge the installed battery with a battery
charger which has been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as
an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's
operating instructions before charging the battery.

Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.

Jump-starting

279

G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be

damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is very
likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor
charge the battery. Let the battery thaw first. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter.
The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out
battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jumpstart the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables that are not damaged and have a sufficient cross-section and insulated
terminal clamps.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.

Z

Breakdown assistance

G WARNING

Jump-starting

280

Make sure that:
jumper cables are not damaged.
RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while
the jumper cables are connected to the battery.
RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running,
such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Shift the transmission to position j.
X Turn the SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock and remove it.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.

Breakdown assistance

RThe

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back.
Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the
jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive terminal ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle
first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Close the hood.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
X

X

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

Towing and tow-starting

281

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
specialist workshop.

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if:
Rthe

engine is not running.
brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning.
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply
or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely.

Rthe

G WARNING

the vehicle brakes automatically in certain
situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brake is
released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,
visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the

towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be
damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in
doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly and

smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the
vehicles could be damaged.

You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
is a risk of an accident.
Always switch off the ignition when towing the
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of

G WARNING

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible
gross weight of your vehicle, the:

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,

Rthe

towing eye could detach itself
vehicle/trailer combination could rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
Rthe

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 314).

! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot

30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph
(50km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the front axle must be raised
or the entire vehicle raised and transported.
could damage the vehicle.

use the key instead of the Start/Stop button.
Otherwise, the automatic transmission may
shift to position P when the driver's or frontpassenger door are opened, which could lead
to damage to the transmission.

! Vehicles with automatic transmission must

not be started by tow-starting. This could otherwise damage the transmission.
It is better to have the vehicle transported than
to have it towed away.
If the vehicle can no longer be driven because of
an accident or breakdown, you have the following options:
RTransporting the vehicle.

DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated,
Z

Breakdown assistance

Towing and tow-starting

Breakdown assistance

282

Towing and tow-starting
As a rule, you should have the vehicle transported.
RTowing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar.
Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock.
Rcannot release the electric parking brake.
Rcannot shift the transmission to position i.
The function of the electric parking brake and
the parking lock is dependent on the on-board
voltage.
If the on-board voltage is low or if there is a system malfunction:
Rthe electric parking brake may not be applied
in certain circumstances, or
Rit may no longer be possible to shift the transmission to position j
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. the
radio.
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the
vehicle is towed (Y page 187). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye

Remove the towing eye from the stowage
space.
The towing eye is located with the vehicle tool
kit under the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 270).
Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing eye is
beneath the tire inflation compressor
(Y page 271).
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
X Take cover : off the opening.
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.
X

Removing the towing eye
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
Attach cover : to the bumper and press until
it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the stowage well
beneath the cargo compartment floor in the
cargo compartment (Y page 270).
X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the tire
inflation compressor (Y page 271).

X

X

Towing the vehicle with the front axle
raised
Observe the important safety notes when towing your vehicle with the front axle raised
(Y page 281).
Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed
with the front axle raised.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed

with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up
and transported.

! The ignition must be switched off if the vehi-

The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and
at the front, under covers :.

cle is being towed with the front axle raised.
Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and damage
the brake system.
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: you must use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 123).
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Towing and tow-starting
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the automatic locking
(Y page 187).
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 102).
X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position g and leave the SmartKey in the ignition
lock.

283

resetting the combination switch, the hazard
warning lamp starts flashing again.

X

Transporting the vehicle
4MATIC vehicles or vehicles with automatic transmission
! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the
front and rear axles must be stationary and on
the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
over the connection point of the transport
vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
otherwise be damaged.

It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 281).
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: you must use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 123).
The automatic transmission automatically shifts
to position j when you open the driver's or
front-passenger door or when you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to
ensure that the automatic transmission stays in
position i when towing away the vehicle, you
must observe the following points:
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 102).
X

i In order to signal a change of direction when

towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination
switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator
lamps for the direction of travel flash. After

All vehicles
! You may only secure the vehicle by the

wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Shift the transmission to position i.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the electric parking brake.
X Shift the transmission to position j.
X Turn the SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock and remove it.
X Secure the vehicle.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes.
X

Z

Breakdown assistance

Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground

284

Fuses
wise, components or systems could be damaged.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles

Breakdown assistance

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed

with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may only either be towed
away with both axles on the ground or be loaded
up and transported.
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is
damaged, have the vehicle transported on a
truck or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical system:
If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position j. To shift the
automatic transmission to position i, you
must provide power to the vehicle's on-board
electrical system in the same way as when jumpstarting (Y page 278).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or
trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must

not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission.

i You can find information on "Jump-starting"
under (Y page 278).

Fuses
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded.
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
Only use fuses marked with an "S". Other-

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it is

lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognize by the
color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is in the fuse box in the
front-passenger footwell (Y page 285).
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Before changing a fuse
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 141).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
g. This corresponds to the SmartKey being
removed from the ignition.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
X

RFuse

box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel
RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the
front-passenger footwell (Y page 285).

Fuses

285

Fuse box in the engine compartment
G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.

X
X

Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close.
Close the hood.

Open the hood.
Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from
the fuse box.
X To open: open clamps ;.
X Fold up cover : in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.

X
X

To open: open the front-passenger door.
Remove the floormat.
X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the
direction of the arrow.
X

X

To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in cover :.
X Insert cover : at the back into openings =
on the fuse box.
X Fold down cover :.
X

To release cover =, press retaining
clamp ;.
X Fold out cover = in the direction of the arrow
to the catch.
X

Z

Breakdown assistance

Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell

Fuses

286

Remove cover = forwards.
Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the
lower right-hand side of cover =.
X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand side
of the fuse box into the retainer.
Cover = engages in the retainers.
X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock audibly.
X Fold back perforated floor covering :.
X Install the floormats.

Breakdown assistance

X

Operation

G WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original
part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation

Further information regarding wheels and tires
can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 312).
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Information on tire pressure can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 298)
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 139)
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 290)

Rmodel

Operation

When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:

Information on driving

Rdesignation
Rmanufacturer
Rmodel

G WARNING
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
Rdo

not drive with a flat tire.
replace the flat tire with your
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
Rimmediately

Rpay

attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about:
Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations

Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
tire damage could also be causing the unusual
handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels
or tires.

Regular checking of wheels and tires
G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.

Z

Wheels and tires

Important safety notes

287

Wheels and tires

288

Operation
Check wheels and tires for damage at least once
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels
can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular
attention to damage such as:
RCuts in the tires
RPunctures in the tires
RTears in the tires
RBulges on tires
RDeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tire (Y page 288). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure
monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 290).
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 312).
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
RDriving style
RTire pressure
RDistance covered

Notes on tire tread
G WARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
should regularly check the tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.

Minimum tire tread depth for:
RSummer

tires: â in (3 mm)
tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
RM+S

Marking : shows where bar indicator ; for
tread wear is integrated into the tire tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type

and make.
Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tires

Winter operation

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an activated tire pressure loss warning
system (Canada only) or tire pressure monitor
(USA only) and only on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a
flat tire (Y page 271).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 307).

Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle
to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
temperatures could cause cracks to form,
thereby damaging the tires permanently.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for
this type of damage.

G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires
G WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter
tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in
winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.

Z

Wheels and tires

with run-flat characteristics)" section
(Y page 271).
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the
wheels.
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the
first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only
reach their full performance after this distance.
RDo not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces the
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 312).

289

290

Tire pressure
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 290).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (USA only)
(Y page 297).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada) (Y page 294)

Snow chains
G WARNING
If snow chains are mounted on the rear
wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion
to the vehicle body or to chassis components.
This could cause damage to the vehicle or the
tires. There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
Rnever

mount snow chains on the rear
wheels
Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the
front wheels.

Wheels and tires

! On some tire sizes there is not enough space

for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire combinations" section under "Tires and wheels".
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have
been specially approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality. For more information,
please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear
the following points in mind:
RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheeltire combinations (Y page 312).
ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to a road that is not snow-covered.
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if
you wish to mount snow chains.
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are
installed (Y page 165).

You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling
away with snow chains installed . You can
thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled
manner, achieving an increased driving force
(cutting action).
ESP® (all vehicles except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 65)
RDeactivate ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(Y page 66)
Information about driving with an emergency
spare wheel (Y page 312).
RDeactivate

Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
Rthe

tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel:
Rmonthly,

at least
the load changes
Rbefore beginning a long journey
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Rif

i The data on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion placard and tire pressure table shown
here are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data shown here. The tire pressure
specifications that are valid for your vehicle
can be found on the Tire and Loading Infor-

Tire pressure

291

mation placard and tire pressure table on the
vehicle.

General notes

Tire and Loading Information placard

The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for
that tire size; see illustration (example).

: Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 298).
The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
actual number of seats may differ.

Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
illustration (example).

Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (Y page 302).

Z

Wheels and tires

The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with an emergency spare wheel:
information on operation with an emergency
spare wheel can be found in the general notes in
the "Emergency spare wheel" section
(Y page 312).
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

292

Tire pressure
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighter loads and/or lower road
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the
higher values:
Rif you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loads and/

or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can
lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Wheels and tires

Important notes on tire pressure
G WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a
risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
can be checked in the on-board computer.

The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent
on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
Rif the vehicle has been driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on the
outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the
tire load. If the tire temperature changes by
18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by
approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take
this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
too low for the current operating conditions. If
you check the tire pressure when the tires are
warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 139)

Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:
Roverheat,

Radversely

leading to tire defects
affect handling

Tire pressure
Rhave

excessively and/or unevenly
an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires
G WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
because they are damaged more easily by
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
severely impair the braking properties and the
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:
Rincrease

the braking distance
affect handling
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
Rbe more susceptible to damage
Radversely

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-

sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 290).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.

Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(Y page 290).
Information on air pressure for the tires on your
vehicle can be found:
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 139)
Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
proceed as follows:
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
checked.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure table
(Y page 290).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only)
General notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure
loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
This enables the system to detect significant
pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
a corresponding warning message will appear in
the multifunction display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning
by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press
Z

Wheels and tires

Rwear

293

294

Tire pressure
'OK' to Restart message in the multifunction
display in the Serv. menu. Information on the
message display can be found in the "Restarting
the tire pressure loss warning" section
(Y page 294).

Wheels and tires

Important safety notes
The tire pressure warning system does not warn
you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 290).
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An
even loss of pressure on several tires at the
same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
movements.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of
acceleration).
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof)

Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if
you have:
Rchanged the tire pressure
Rchanged the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires for
the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure
table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire
pressure loss warning system can only give
reliable warnings if you have set the correct

tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is
set, these incorrect values will be monitored.
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 290).
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
X Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Active Press
'OK' to Restart message appears in the
multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
Press the a button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears in the multifunction display.
X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes.
X Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires.
X

If you wish to cancel the restart:
X

or

Press the % button.

If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears, press the 9 or : button to
select Cancel.
X Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
X

Tire pressure monitor (Canada only)
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
functions if the corresponding sensors are
installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the
multifunction display. After a few minutes of
driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is

shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction
display, see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, refer to
the "Checking the tire pressure electronically"
section (Y page 296).

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once every two
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,
you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
(Y page 290). Note that the correct tire pressure
for the current operating situation must first be
taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a substantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning
threshold for the warning message is aligned to
the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire
pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of
the cold tires (Y page 297). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a
result, a warning message will appear if the tire
pressure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 290).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
movements.
Z

295

Wheels and tires

Tire pressure

Tire pressure

Wheels and tires

296

The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire
pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire
pressure on one or more tires is significantly
too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
minute and then remains lit constantly, the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message
appears in the multifunction display. Observe
the information on display messages
(Y page 211).
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately
one minute and then remaining lit. When the
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of
driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer
refer to those measured at sea level. At high
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a
pressure gauge are higher than those shown by
the on-board computer. In this case, do not
reduce the tire pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way
radios) that may be being operated in or near the
vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electronically
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
X Press the a button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is shown
in the multifunction display.

X

If the vehicle was parked for longer than
20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
displayed after driving a few minutes
message is shown.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new
sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire
pressure value to the individual wheels is not
possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active
message is shown instead of the tire pressure
display. The tire pressures are already being
monitored.
If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the
system may continue to show the tire pressure
of the wheel that has been removed for a few
minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is
mounted is not the same as the current tire
pressure of the emergency spare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warning messages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
RIf

the Please Correct Tire Pressure
message appears in the multifunction display,
the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.
The tire pressure must be corrected when the
opportunity arises.
RIf the Check Tire Pressure message
appears in the multifunction display, the tire
pressure in one or more tires has dropped
significantly. The tires must be checked.
RIf the Tire Pressure Warning Tire Fail‐
ure message appears, the tire pressure in one
or more tires has dropped suddenly. The tires
must be checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the
display messages in the "Tires" section
(Y page 211).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
the tire pressures may be displayed for the
wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified
after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions.

Tire pressure

When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values
for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure
monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire
pressure. However, you can also set reference
values manually as described here. The tire
pressure monitor then monitors the new tire
pressure values.
X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 290).
You can find more tire pressure values for
various operating conditions in the tire pressure table inside the fuel filler flap
(Y page 139).
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on
all four wheels.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
X Press the a button.
The multifunction display shows the current
tire pressure for each tire or the Tire pres‐
sure will be displayed after driving
a few minutes message.
X Press the : button.
The multifunction display shows the Use
Current Pressures as New Reference
Values message.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X

Press the a button.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures are
within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values
and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:
X

Press the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor
Country

Radio type approval number

USA

FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
FCCIC ID:MRXGG4 This device
complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with license exempt
RSS standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions. (1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference
received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation. Le present appareil est
conforme d'industrie Canada
applicables aux appereils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est authorisee aux deux conditions suivantes. (1). L'appareil
ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme
si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. WARNING: Changes
or modifications not expressively
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
users authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC:" before
the radio certification number
only signifies Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID:MRXMC34MA4 This
device complies with part 15 of
the FCC rules and with license
exempt RSS standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following conditions. (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation. Le present appareil
est conforme d'industrie Canada
applicables aux appereils radio
exempts de license. L'exploitation est authorisee aux deux conditions suivantes. (1). L'appareil
Z

Wheels and tires

Restarting the tire pressure monitor

297

298

Loading the vehicle
Country

Wheels and tires

Canada

Radio type approval number
ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme
si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. WARNING: Changes
or modifications not expressively
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
users authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC:" before
the radio certification number
only signifies Canada technical
specifications were met.
IC: 2546A-MW2433A
IC:2546A-GG4 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with license exempt
RSS standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions. (1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference
received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation. Le present appareil est
conforme d'industrie Canada
applicables aux appereils radio
exempts de license. L'exploitation est authorisee aux deux conditions suivantes. (1). L'appareil
ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme
si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. WARNING: Changes
or modifications not expressively
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
users authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC:" before
the radio certification number
only signifies Canada technical
specifications were met.
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
and Loading Information placard shows the
maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle
load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
and corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the Bpillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross
vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle
weight rating on the front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
the maximum load or the maximum gross
axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Loading the vehicle
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating

299

Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehiclespecific and can differ from the details shown.
The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific
and may differ from that in the illustration.
You can find the valid maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on
the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
Tire and Loading Information placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
Z

Wheels and tires

Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
and luggage must not exceed the specified
value.

X

300

Loading the vehicle
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 298).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

1500 lbs (680 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg)

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Number of people in
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)

5

3

1

Distribution of the
occupants

Front: 2
Rear: 3

Front: 1
Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occupants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
(82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
(73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs
(91 kg)
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(86 kg)
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)

Gross weight of all
occupants

750 lbs (340 kg)

540 lbs (245 kg)

150 lbs (68 kg)

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
540 lbs (245 kg)
=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
150 lbs (68 kg) =
1350 lbs (612 kg)

Combined maximum
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)

Wheels and tires

Step 2

Step 3
Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
mum gross vehicle
750 lbs (340 kg) =
weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg)
Tire and Loading Information placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)

Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross

vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 298).

All about wheels and tires

All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards

Example:
RTreadwear

grade: 200
grade: AA
RTemperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
RTraction

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.
government course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction
G WARNING

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
government specifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and
= temperature grade. These regulations do not
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in
North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to

the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Z

Wheels and tires

Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

301

302

All about wheels and tires
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (Y page 288). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that
are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
(Y page 289).

Tire labeling
Overview

Temperature
G WARNING

Wheels and tires

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

(Y page 306)

; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi-

cation Number (Y page 305)
Maximum load rating (Y page 304)
Maximum tire pressures (Y page 293)
Manufacturer
Tire material (Y page 305)
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speed rating (Y page 302)
D Load index (Y page 304)
E Tire name

=
?
A
B
C

The markings described above are on the tire in
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and
the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the

All about wheels and tires

:
;
=
?
A
B

Tire width
Nominal aspect ratio in %
Tire code
Rim diameter
Load bearing index
Speed rating

General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may
not contain any letters or may contain one letter
that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger
vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing
standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire
width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio
between the tire height and tire width and is
shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated
by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over
149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size

description, depending on the manufacturer
(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim
flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a
numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 298).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.
For further information on the maximum tire
load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 304).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 304).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate

from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your
driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires
Index

Speed rating

Q

up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R

up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S

up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T

up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H

up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V

up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W

up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y

up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y

up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y)

over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR

over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally,

tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
Z

Wheels and tires

tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.

303

All about wheels and tires

304

Wheels and tires

the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
The service specification is made up of loadbearing index A and speed rating B.
RIf the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service specifications,
ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out
the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed
rating in the service specification. Example:
245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum
speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR" and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is
over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index

Speed rating

Q M+S1

up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1

up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1

up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

M+S1

up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

V

i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide

the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire
wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
snow. They have been especially developed
for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.

1

Or M+S i for winter tires.

Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 312).
Further information about reading tire data can
be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters that
identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire.
Speed rating (Y page 302).
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

All about wheels and tires
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 298).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

305

Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
provides information about the age of a tire. The
first and second positions represent the week of
manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent
the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that
is marked with "3208", was manufactured in
week 32 in 2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the
requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code
with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
see (Y page 312).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific
characteristics of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread
and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,
polyester and other materials.

Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehicle
is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Z

Wheels and tires

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on
the sidewall of each tire produced.

306

All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer
following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of
the tire.

The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the
vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is
specified on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Recommended tire pressures

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.

The maximum weight is the sum of:
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
Rthe weight of the accessories
Rthe load limit
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
equipment

Wheels and tires

Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.

Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is
mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
side.

Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identification.
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is
approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel,
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.

Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is
bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1 bar.

Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity
more precisely.

Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load rating
The maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
two.

Changing a wheel
PSI (pounds per square inch)

Load bearing index

A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

The load bearing index (also load index) is a code
that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire.

Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent.

Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold.

307

Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the tires
and the road surface.

Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)
has been reached.

Cold tire pressure

Occupant distribution

The tires are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
1 mile (1.6 km)

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their
designated seating positions.

Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
the vehicle.

The part of the tire that comes into contact with
the road.

Changing a wheel

Bead

Flat tire

The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
the wheel rim.

Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.

The "Breakdown assistance" section
(Y page 271) contains information and notes on
how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 271).

Weight of optional extras

Rotating the wheels

The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories.

G WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used by
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example
for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
the manufacturing date.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure

monitor, electronic components are located
in the wheel.
Z

Wheels and tires

Tread

Wheels and tires

308

Changing a wheel
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
the valve. This could damage the electronic
components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the
"Changing a wheel" section (Y page 307).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in
the center.
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
be required earlier. Do not change the direction
of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,
restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only) or the tire pressure monitor (USA
only).

Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if
the tires are installed corresponding to the
direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
position.
X Shift the transmission to position j.
X Switch off the engine.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
u. This is the same as “key removed”.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 122).
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone (Y page 83).
X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 141).
X

i Apart from certain country-specific varia-

tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a
tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a
wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more
information on which tools are required to
perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
example:
RJack
RWheel chock
RLug wrench

Changing a wheel
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away

309

must be positioned vertically, directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.

! Only position the jack at the appropriate

jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you
could damage the vehicle.
Observe the following when raising the vehicle:

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 270).
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away, for example when changing a wheel.
X Fold both plates up :.
X Fold out lower plate ;.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the
openings in base plate =.

X

Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle
G WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack

cific jack that has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
changed. It must not be used for performing
maintenance work under the vehicle.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and
inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be
used, e.g. rubber mats.
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height.
RMake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RNever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid
when the vehicle is raised.
RMake sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Z

Wheels and tires

RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-

Changing a wheel

310

Wheels and tires

X

Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the
wheel you wish to change by about one full
turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

Take ratchet wrench A out of the vehicle tool
kit and place it on the hexagon nut of jack ?
so that the letters AUF are visible.
X Position jack ? at jacking point =.

X

Jacking points

The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheel housings and just in front of the rear
wheel housings (arrows).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with
AMG Line: to protect the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers installed next to the jacking
points on the outer sills.

X

Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.

Turn ratchet wrench A until jack ? sits
completely on jacking point = and the base
of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn ratchet wrench A until the tire is raised
a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
X

Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could
otherwise be damaged when you screw them
in.
X Unscrew the wheel bolts.
X Remove the wheel.

Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG Line)
X

Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles
with AMG Line: fold cover ; upwards.

Mounting a new wheel
G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel

Changing a wheel

G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.

Lowering the vehicle
G WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible.
X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
once again standing firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.

X

Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(Y page 307).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces.
X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and
push it on.
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight.

X

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise
pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).
The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools
in the vehicle again.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles
with AMG Line: use the cover of the outer sill.
X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 290).
Canada only: as long as you are driving with the
emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning
system when the defective wheel has been
replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor (USA
only): all mounted wheels must be equipped
with functioning sensors.
X

Z

Wheels and tires

bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

311

312

Wheel and tire combinations
Wheel and tire combinations
General notes
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You should regularly check the pressure of the
emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to
long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 290). The value on the wheel is
valid.

Wheels and tires

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use tires and wheels
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
specifically for your vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS or
ESP®, and are marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when
driving with a load, tire dimension variations
could cause the tires to come into contact
with the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
accessories other than those tested and
approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-

ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
you have no information about their previous
usage.

The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions
(Y page 290).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip
the vehicle:
Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left
and right)
Rwith the same type of tire (summer tires,
MOExtended tires, winter tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 271).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle electronics
Information regarding technical data
i The data stated here specifically refers to a
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics
Installing two-way radios and mobile
phones (RF transmitters)
G WARNING

313

In particular, the following conditions must be
complied with:
Ronly approved wavebands may be used.
Robserve the maximum permissible output
in these wavebands.
Ronly approved antenna positions may be
used.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
account current scientific discussions relating
to the possible health hazards that may result
from electromagnetic fields.

G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from incorrectly operated RF transmitters can interfere
with the vehicle electronics, for example:
Rif

the RF transmitter is not connected with
an exterior antenna
Rthe exterior antenna has been installed
incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type
This can compromise the operational safety
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna
mounted at a qualified specialist workshop.
When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them with the low-reflection exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated if

the instructions for installation and use of RF
transmitters are not observed.

Approved antenna positions
: Front roof area
; Rear roof area
= Rear fender
? Trunk lid

i On vehicles with panorama roof with power

tilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to the
front or rear roof area is not permitted.
On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
position the antenna on the side of the vehicle
closest to the center of the road.
Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles
- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment).
Observe the legal requirements for accessory
parts.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply or antenna
connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supplement when installing.
Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Z

Technical data

The electromagnetic radiation from modified
or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can
interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can
compromise the operational safety of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.

314

Identification plates
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the antenna must not exceed the following values:

Technical data

Frequency band

Maximum
transmission
output

Short wave
3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband
74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband
144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio system/
Tetra
380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband
400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications
(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN)

X

The following can be used in the vehicle without
restrictions:
RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW
RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio system/Tetra)
RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There is no restriction for antenna positions on
the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands:
RTrunked radio system/Tetra
R70 cm waveband
R2G/3G/4G

Open the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
: VIN
; Paint code

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
: VIN
; Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identification

plate is used only as an example. This data is

Service products and filling capacities
different for every vehicle and can deviate
from the data shown here. You can find the
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

315

Service products and filling capacities
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.

H Environmental note

The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 314).
The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of
the windshield (Y page 315).

Engine number

: Emission control information plate, includ-

ing the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards
; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
= Engine number (stamped into the crankcase)

Service products include the following:
RFuels

RLubricants

RCoolant
RBrake

(e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)

fluid

RWindshield

washer fluid
control system refrigerant
Components and service products must match.
Only use products recommended by MercedesBenz. Damage which is caused by the use of
products which have not been recommended is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or
goodwill gestures. Products approved by
Mercedes-Benz are listed in this Operator's
Manual in the appropriate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on
the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
RClimate

Z

Technical data

Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost
position.
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;.
X

Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner.

316

Service products and filling capacities
Other identifications, for example:
R0 W-30
R5 W-30
R5 W-40

Fuel

Tank capacity
Model

Total capacity

CLA 250

13.2 US gal
(50.0 l)

All other models

14.8 US gal
(56.0 l)

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.

Technical data

G WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash

away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.

Model

Of which
reserve

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles

Approx.
2.1 US gal
(8.0 l)

All other models

Approx.
1.6 US gal
(6.0 l)

Gasoline
Fuel grade

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
the vehicle with other fuels can lead to damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
system.

! Do not use the following:
RGasoline

with more than 10% ethanol
(100% ethanol)
RGasoline with methanol
RM100 (100% methanol)
RGasoline with metalliferous additives
RDiesel
RE100

Service products and filling capacities
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-

ance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable
and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline
of a lower grade, observe the following precautions:
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular
unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as
possible.
RDo not drive at the maximum speed.
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the
label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff.

317

The fuel quality available in some countries may
not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the
fuel injection system as a result. In such cases,
and in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
and mixing ratios specified on the container.

Engine oil
General notes

i For further information, consult a qualified

Additives

! Operating the engine with fuel additives

added later can lead to engine failure. Do not
mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not
include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be
mixed with additives recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions
for use on the product label. More information
about recommended additives can be
obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives.

! Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with

specifications deviating from those expressly
required for the prescribed service intervals.
Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in
order to set replacement intervals longer than
those prescribed. This could otherwise cause
damage to the engine or exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions on the service interval
display for changing the engine oil. This could
otherwise cause damage to the engine or
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the important
safety notes on service products (Y page 315).
The engine oils are matched to the performance
of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
You should therefore only use engine oils and oil
filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.

Z

Technical data

specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
CLA 250, CLA 250 Sport, CLA 250 4MATIC,
CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available,
you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON.
All other models: as a temporary measure, if
the recommended fuel is not available, you may
also use regular unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may
reduce engine performance and increase fuel
consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and
sudden acceleration. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI.
Information on refueling (Y page 139).

318

Service products and filling capacities
Model

MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval

All models

229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils
for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers.

Filling capacities
The following values refer to an engine oil
change, including the oil filter.
Model

Capacity

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles

5.8 US qt (5.5 l)

All other models

5.9 US qt (5.6 l)

Additives
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.

Technical data

Brake fluid
G WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products
(Y page 315).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in
the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can be
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a

qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Coolant
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
antifreeze from components before starting
the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixed

with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be found
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
in countries where high temperatures prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a

qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Comply with the important safety precautions
for service products when handling coolant
(Y page 315).
The coolant is a mixture of water and corrosion
inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate. It performs
the following tasks:
RAnti-corrosion protection
RAntifreeze protection
RRaising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to
-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant
during operation is approximately 266 ‡
(130 †).

Service products and filling capacities
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
should:
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †)
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be
dissipated as effectively
Mercedes-Benz recommends a coolant or corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in
accordance with
MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

i The coolant is checked with every mainte-

nance interval at a qualified specialist workshop.

Filling capacities

319

When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products
(Y page 315).
At temperatures above freezing:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-

merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
year round.

Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes

Capacity

Mercedes‑AMG
vehicles

Approx. 12.6 US qt
(11.9 l)

All other models

Approx. 8.2 US qt
(7.8 l)

Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R‑134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the left, on the underside of the hood.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil

approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
any other PAG oil that is not approved for
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate
control system may be damaged.
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or
replacing component parts, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,
must be adhered to.
Always have work on the climate control system
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit

washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Otherwise, the level sensor may give a false reading.

Z

Technical data

Model

320

Vehicle data
Refrigerant instruction label

Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
RThe heights specified may vary as a result of:
- Tires
- Load
- Condition of the suspension
- Optional equipment
ROptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload.

Example: refrigerant instruction label
: Warning symbol
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant

Dimensions and weights

Warning symbol : advises you about:
RPossible

dangers

RHaving service work carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop

Technical data

Filling capacities
Model

Refrigerant

Mercedes‑AMG
vehicles

23.6 ± 0.4 oz
(670 ± 10 g)

All other models

22.9 ± 0.4 oz
(650 ± 10 g)

Model

PAG oil

All models

4.2 oz
(120 g)

Model

:
Height when
opened

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles

68.0 in
(1727 mm)

All other models

68.3 in
(1737 mm)

Model
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors

80.0 in (2032 mm)

Wheelbase

106.3 in (2699 mm)

Turning radius

36.1 ft (11.0 m)

Turning circle,
Mercedes-AMG
vehicles

36.2 ft (11.04 m)

Vehicle data
Vehicle length

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles

184.7 in (4691 mm)

All other models

182.7 in (4640 mm)

Model

Vehicle height

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles

55.7 in (1416 mm)

All other models

56.5 in (1436 mm)

Model

Maximum roof
load

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles

220.5 lb (100 kg)

All other models

220.5 lb (100 kg)

Model

Maximum trunk
load

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles

220.5 lb (100 kg)

All other models

220.5 lb (100 kg)

Technical data

Model

321

Z

322

323

324
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Modify Date                     : 2017:03:29 15:53:47-04:00
Create Date                     : 2017:03:29 15:52:02-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2017:03:29 15:53:47-04:00
Creator Tool                    : AH XSL Formatter V6.1 MR1 for Windows (x64) : 6.1.6.12100 (2013/07/19 17:47JST)
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Owner: y.io.creator
Document ID                     : uuid:c8c01c19-d115-4eef-b9d4-96e18c0da732
Instance ID                     : uuid:42f1319a-a42e-41ad-8d9d-3563643372a1
Producer                        : OneVision PDFengine (Windows 64bit Build 25.092.S)
Page Count                      : 326
Author                          : Owner: y.io.creator
Keywords                        : Stylesheet-Version, 3.10.13, (SAXON, 8.9, from, Saxonica)
One Vision Creator              : Speedflow Check Version 11.5 (SR 4)
One Vision Dongle ID            : _9DmSJQI6Za8Q6
One Vision Producer             : OneVision PDFengine (Windows 64bit Build 25.092.S)
Title                           : 
Trapped                         : False
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu